JP6847536B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, a projector that projects irradiation light from the back side of the cabinet to the front side, a reflector that is placed on the upper part of the front side of the cabinet and reflects the irradiation light projected from the projector to the back side of the cabinet, and a reflector A game machine including a screen on which the reflected light emitted from the projector is projected from the front side is disclosed (see Patent Document 1). According to such a game machine, the irradiation light projected from the projector can be reflected by the reflector on the front side and projected on the screen on the back side.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-5677

However, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, although it is necessary to provide a reflector in order to properly project the irradiation light from the projector onto the screen in the limited space inside the game machine, the reflector is on the front side in the game machine of Patent Document 1. Since it is provided, there is a problem that the upper part of the game machine pops out forward and spoils the aesthetic appearance.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light onto a screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a projection device (for example, a projector unit b) capable of projecting a predetermined image, a reflection unit (for example, a mirror member b3) capable of reflecting the projected light emitted from the projection device, and the above. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a screen unit (for example, screen unit b4) that projects the predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting unit.
A mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame and capable of accommodating a game machine component (for example, a main board 70A). 430) and a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member are further provided.
The mounting base is
The projection device and the reflection unit are attached,
The width of the side surfaces facing each other (for example, the side surface 432) becomes narrower from the front side to the back side.
The cover member is formed so as to project from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the game machine, and can accommodate the game machine component so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member toward the back surface of the game machine. For example, it is provided with a recess 431a).

A game machine having such a configuration includes a projection device, a reflection unit, and a screen unit. The projection device can project a predetermined image. The reflecting unit can reflect the projected light emitted from the projection device. The screen unit projects a predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting unit. Further, the game machine further includes a mounting frame, a cover member, and a mounting base. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame and can accommodate game machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. A projection device and a reflecting portion are attached to the mounting base, and the widths of the side surfaces facing each other become narrower from the front side to the back side, and the cover member is from the surface of the cover member to the inside side of the game machine. It is provided with an accommodating portion that is formed so as to project so as not to project the game machine components from the surface of the cover member to the back side of the game machine.

As a result, the projection device and the reflecting portion can be attached to the mounting base provided between the mounting frame and the cover member, so that it is not necessary to provide the reflecting portion so as to protrude from the front of the mounting frame. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of appropriately projecting the irradiation light onto the screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the player.

Further, the width of the mounting base is narrowed from the front side to the back side, the cover member is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the game machine, and the game machine component is formed from the surface of the cover member. It is equipped with a storage unit that can be stored so that it does not protrude to the back side of the game machine. As a result, by accommodating the game machine components in the accommodating portion, it is possible to provide the game machine components between the mounting base and the surface of the cover member so as not to protrude toward the back surface side of the game machine, so that the inside of the game machine is limited. It is possible to effectively use the space.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light onto a screen.

It is external perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation mode of the movable accessory in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of a movable accessory. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line VII-VII of FIG. It is a top view of the state where the decorative cover of a movable accessory is removed. It is a perspective view which shows the reel accessory in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel accessory. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the projector unit in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial notch side view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the projection angle and the projection distance of the projector apparatus in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the projector control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the communication operation of the control circuit in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control circuit main processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control circuit main processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening and closing process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game information data generation processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the port output processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control circuit main processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect selection process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect suppression process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the modification of the game board. It is a front view which shows the modification of the game board. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation on the game board shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation on the game board shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. It is a figure which shows the example of the reach effect operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the reach effect operation in the game board shown in FIG. 47. It is a top view which shows the deformation example of a movable accessory. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LII-LII of FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows other modification of the movable accessory. It is a figure which shows other modification of the movable accessory. It is a partial notch side view of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a partial notch side view of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine shown in FIG. 57. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine shown in FIG. 57. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine shown in FIG. 55. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation of the game machine shown in FIG. 55. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st modification of the effect suppression process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd modification of the effect suppression process. It is a figure which shows the light emission luminance correction table used in the 2nd modification of the effect suppression process. It is external perspective view of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the mounting base in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the mounting base in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the main body frame in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the optical axis of the projected light emitted from the projector unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view seen from the back side of the cover member in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view seen from the front side of the cover member in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between the game board relay board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, a hole for a board of a mounting base, and an opening of a cover member. It is a top view of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st guide gutter and the 2nd guide gutter in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st guide gutter and the 2nd guide gutter in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the payout device in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the ball passage unit included in the payout device in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the ball passage unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the ball passage unit in the direction different from FIG. 84. It is a top view which shows the 1st taxiway of the ball passage unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the 2nd taxiway of the ball passage unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the out opening of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the ball detection unit located behind the out opening in the state which the game board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention is removed. It is a perspective view which shows the whole ball detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the ball detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the sphere detection unit in the direction different from FIG. 91. It is an internal side view of the right side component constituting the ball detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an internal side view of the left side component constituting the ball detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the projecting piece member which constitutes the ball detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the glass door provided with the dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an overall front view which shows the front of the glass door in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the whole dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the state in which the saucer cover member of the dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention is removed. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body part, the ball pulling passage member, and the lid opening / closing part in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is an exploded view of the figure shown in FIG. 102. It is a perspective view of the ball pulling passage member in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of AA'in FIG. 104. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB'in FIG. 104. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball pulling passage member in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Structure of pachinko game machine>
First, the structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. 1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a partially disassembled perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board used in the game machine of the present embodiment. As the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to the game board 12, the main body 2, the base door 3 which is openably and closably attached to the main body 2, and the base door 3 which can be opened and closed. The glass door 4, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the payout device 16, and the substrate unit 17 are provided.

[Main body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood. The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the main body 2.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is arranged in front of the main body 2 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine), and is rotatably supported by the main body 2 via the main body frame hinge 2b. That is, by rotating the base door 3 around the main body frame hinge 2b provided at the side end portion of one of the main bodies 2 (left side when viewed from the front in the present embodiment), the opening 2a of the main body 2 Is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a. The opening 3a is formed from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the region.

A game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout device 16, and a board unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member. The game board 12 is located behind the protective glass 28 of the glass door 4, which will be described later, and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

On the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1), a game area 12a on which the game ball launched from the launching device 15 rolls is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular. Further, a plurality of game nails 56 (partially not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 4 and the like.

The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The display area 13a is set to a size that occupies a part of the surface of the game board 12 (game area 12a). The display area 13a uniformly forms a black or gray screen when the image is not displayed in the power off state. The size of the display area 13a may be set so as to occupy the entire surface of the game board 12 (game area 12a). In the display area 13a, various images such as an identification symbol for effect (for example, an image showing a number), an effect image (for example, an image showing a character or a background), and a decorative image (for example, an image showing a decorative pattern) are displayed. .. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12. In the following, the image displayed in the display area 13a by driving the liquid crystal of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be referred to as a liquid crystal image.

Although the liquid crystal display device 13 is applied in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and examples of the display device include a plasma display, a projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, and an organic display. An EL (Electro Luminescence) display or the like may be applied.

The plate unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the upper plate 21. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout port 21a and a supply port 22a for lending the game ball and paying out the game ball (prize ball), respectively. When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 21a and the supply port 22a, and are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a by the launching device 15.

The plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is mounted on the upper plate 21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing a predetermined operation effect using the effect button 23, and when performing a predetermined operation effect, the effect button 23 is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. An image prompting you to operate is displayed. Further, apart from the display of the image accompanying the game, a selection button 31 for operating the menu screen for displaying the game history and individual game data and a decision button 32 for confirming the selected content are provided.

The launcher 15 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by the player, and the launching handle 25 is rotatably supported.

Although not shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the launching device 15 is provided with a solenoid actuator (launching driving device) that controls the launching operation of the game ball. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 25, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 123 (see FIG. 14) connected to the main control circuit 70 (see FIG. 14) controls the launch operation. Inside the launching device 15, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the launching handle 25 in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the launch handle 25 in the clockwise direction. Further, when the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the firing handle 25, the firing handle 25 is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator. Then, when the player grasps the launch handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 25. , The power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12 while being guided along the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 4).

The payout device 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout device 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition. The board unit 17 has various control boards. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70 and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 14), which will be described later.

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size of covering the game board 12. A pair of speakers 11 are arranged on the upper portion (near the upper end portion) of the glass door 4. A speaker cover 29 is provided on the front surface of the glass door 4 in an upper region facing the speaker 11. In the following description, the "front" is the surface of the pachinko machine facing the player, and the "back" is the surface of the pachinko machine opposite to the surface facing the player.

In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area of the game board 12 facing the game area 12a. A protective glass 28 having light transmission is attached to the opening 4a. As a result, the opening 4a of the glass door 4 is closed. Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12a of the game board 12.

Further, an upper decorative unit 40 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 4. The upper decoration unit 40 is arranged so as to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The inside of the upper decorative unit 40 is formed in a cavity, and the projector unit B (see FIG. 11) is housed in this cavity. The projector unit B will be described later.

As is well shown in FIG. 2, a frame member 4b is provided on the back surface side of the glass door 4, and the speaker 11 and the projector unit B are attached to the upper part of the frame member 4b.

The upper decorative unit 40 is provided with speaker covers 29 on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker cover 29 is formed as a mesh-shaped opening. The speaker cover 29 covers the front of the speaker 11, and the sound generated from the speaker 11 is emitted to the outside through the speaker cover 29.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 4, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector (gate) 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory 46 are provided. Is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning openings 51 and 52, a first large winning opening 53, a second large winning opening 54, an out opening 55, and a plurality of game nails 56 are provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, and a normal symbol hold display device 63 are located above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 arranged substantially in the center thereof. , The first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided. On the front surface of the game board 12, a plurality of decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C capable of emitting light are provided in each portion near the peripheral edge of the game area 12a. On the front surface of the game board 12, when viewed from the player side, the reel accessory is located at the lower part of the display area 13a and on the left side of the first starting port 44 through the opening 12b provided in the game board 12 (game area 12a). 67 is provided so as to be visible. Further, on the right side of the upper region on the back surface of the game board 12 when viewed from the player side, a movable accessory 68 imitating a sword is operably provided up to a position overlapping the display region 13a.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, a 7-segment counter for directing is also provided on the front surface of the game board 12. The 7-segment counter for production is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. Further, in the present embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. May be good.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 is composed of an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape for partitioning the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape arranged inside (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Will be done. The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launching device is placed between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c that guides the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip of the inner rail 41b. Then, a ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball discharge port 41d. The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first start port 44, and the second start port 45, and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the right end portion of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a passing game ball. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery for whether or not it is a "hit" is performed, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is arranged below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is arranged below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball. Hereinafter, the entry or inflow of the game ball into or through the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45, the first predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are paid out. In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the ball is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. The display starts. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether the ball is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol is changed based on the result of the lottery. The display starts.

The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 44. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 are conveyed to the game ball collection unit through the out port 55 provided on the game board 12.

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 has a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 14) for driving the pair of blade members. The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and is in an open state in which a pair of blade members are expanded to facilitate winning a game ball in the second starting port 45, and the pair of blade members are closed. One of the closed states that makes it impossible to win the game ball is generated in the second starting port 45. In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. May be good.

The general winning openings 51 and 52 are arranged near the lower part of the game area. The general winning openings 51 and 52 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball. In the following, the entry or inflow of a game ball into or through the general winning openings 51 and 52 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning openings 51 and 52, a second predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out. The general winning balls 51 and 52 are provided with general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a (see FIG. 14) for detecting the game balls that have won the prize.

The first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting opening 44 and the general winning opening 52. The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first large winning opening 53 is arranged above the second large winning opening 54. To. Both the first prize opening 53 and the second prize opening 54 are so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and the opening / closing shutters 53a and 54a, the first large winning opening solenoid 53b for driving the shutter, and the second large winning opening 54a. It has a winning opening solenoid 54b (see FIG. 14).

Each of the first grand prize opening 53 and the second grand winning opening 54 accepts a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state), and when the shutter is closed (closed state), the game is played. Do not accept the ball. In the following, the entry or inflow of a game ball into or through the first prize opening 53 or the second prize opening 54 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 53, a third predetermined number of balls (15 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 54, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 in the present embodiment) are paid out.

Further, the first large winning opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 14) for counting the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 53. Further, the second special winning opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 14) for counting the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 54.

The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. The out opening 55 accepts a game ball that has not won any of the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the general winning openings 51 and 52, the first major winning opening 53, and the second major winning opening 54. ..

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 4, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when the game ball is hit right). The game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by the game nail 56 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, the player who wins the second start opening 45 is more likely to receive a lottery which is advantageous to the player than the case where the first start opening 44 is won. Therefore, in the so-called time-saving gaming state in which winning the second starting port 45 becomes relatively easy, by hitting right, the possibility of winning the second starting port 45 increases and relatively valuable value is obtained. It will be easy.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device 61 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 61 performs variable display of the special symbol when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 (special symbol start prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the jackpot game state which is the state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 61, the first large winning opening 53 Is open. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 in a specific mode, the second large winning opening 54 is opened.

The open state of each of the first special winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 28 sec) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each large winning opening satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

A game in which the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is in a state in which it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is called a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening will be closed. In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the stop-displayed special symbol is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "loss"), the gaming state does not shift unless the fall lottery is won. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of hold) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved sphere of the first special symbol and the reserved sphere of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is composed of two LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the ordinary symbol display device 62, when the stopped-displayed ordinary symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the ordinary electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 62, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, "the number of holdings") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol holding display device 63 is arranged below the ordinary symbol display device 62.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary symbol hold display device 63 is composed of four LEDs (ordinary symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on / off each of the normal symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, when the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 1, the normal symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol hold display LED from the left). Turns on and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs turn off. When the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 2, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is 3, the 1st to 3rd normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. Then, when the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbols is 4, all the holding display LEDs of the normal symbols are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol holding display device 64 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 and on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The first special symbol hold display device 64 has four LEDs (first special symbol hold display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed from the player side. Lights up.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the second special symbol display device 65 is located on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 in the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 when viewed from the player side, and is the special symbol display device. It is arranged between 61 and the first special symbol holding display device 64.

The second special symbol hold display device 65 has four LEDs (second special symbol hold display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 13 displays various effect images (liquid crystal images) in the display area 13a. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device 61, except for a specific case, for example, as an effect image, a plurality of identifications for the effect consisting of numbers 1 to 8 and various characters are identified. The symbol (decorative symbol) is variablely displayed in the display area 13a. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as a jackpot symbol described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a. As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols stopped and displayed are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

[Decorative members]
The decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C each have a cover member (not shown) having translucency and an LED (not shown) provided on the back side of the cover member, and play LED light through the cover member. It is emitted toward the front of the board 12 (game area 12a). The decorative member 66A is provided on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The decorative member 66B is provided on the left side of the display area 13a and slightly below the decorative member 66A when viewed from the player side. The two decorative members 66C are provided on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 45 on the lower side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The LEDs of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C belong to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14), and are controlled to emit light, blink, turn off, or increase or decrease the brightness as an effect. As a result, the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C improve the effect of producing light.

[Reel accessory]
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the reel accessory 67 is attached to the back surface of the game board 12. As shown well in FIG. 10, the reel accessory 67 is a first support that rotatably supports a hollow reel body 670 in which a sheet member 671 is wound in a tubular shape and one end (right end) of the reel body 670. A member 672, a rotary gear 673 fixed to the other end (left end) of the reel body 670, a motor 674 that drives the rotary gear 673 to rotate in a predetermined direction, and a rotary gear 673 on the other end side of the reel body 670. A second support member 675 that supports the motor 674, a shaft 676 that penetrates the rotary gear 673 and is fixed to the second support member 675 so as to be located inside the reel body 670, and a shaft as seen from the player side. It has a light emitting substrate 678 attached to the rear portion of the 676 and on which the LED 677 is mounted so as to face forward, and a cover member 679 that covers the right side and the rear side of the reel body 670 when viewed from the player side. Although only one LED 677 is shown in FIG. 10 for convenience, a plurality of LED 677s are mounted on the light emitting substrate 678.

As an example, blue 7 and red 7 of identification symbols (identification information) are drawn on the sheet member 671 at predetermined intervals, and a plain blank is formed between blue 7 and red 7. (See FIG. 44). In the present embodiment, the blank is also referred to as an identification symbol. The sheet member 671 is made of a semi-transparent material, and the identification pattern is also formed of a semi-transparent and colorful special ink or the like. When the reel body 670 is rotated as an effect operation, the identification symbol of the seat member 671 is variablely displayed on the peripheral surface of the reel body 670, and a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the subsequent stop mode. It becomes visible to the player from the opening 12b as an indicator of whether or not it is in a state.

Further, when the reel body 670 is rotating or stopped, the LED 677 of the light emitting substrate 678 is controlled to emit light, blink, turn off, or increase or decrease the brightness as an effect. The light of the LED 677 travels forward from the opening 12b of the game board 12 while passing through the seat member 671. As a result, the identification symbols displayed on the peripheral surface of the reel body 670, which are displayed in a variable manner or stopped, are illuminated from the rear, and are easier to see than in the case where the reel body 670 is turned off. Such an LED 677 also belongs to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14) and improves the effect of producing light.

[Movable accessory]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the movable accessory 68 is entirely located on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 so as to be hidden from the player side in the standby state (non-operating state) (FIG. 5 (A). ), In the appearance state, a part (sword part) is configured to move to a position where it overlaps a part of the display area 13a (see FIGS. 5 (B) and 12). As a result, the movable accessory 68 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The movable accessory 68 includes a decorative portion 68A constituting the sword portion and a driving portion 68B for driving the decorative portion 68A. Note that FIGS. 5 (A) and 5 (B) show a state in which the upper decorative unit 40 is removed, and in a state where the upper decorative unit 40 is attached, for example, in the standby state of FIG. 5 (A). The movable accessory 68 cannot actually be seen by the upper decoration unit 40.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the decorative portion 68A is fixed to the base member 680 and the base member 680, and the illuminated substrate 682 on which a plurality of LEDs 681 are mounted and the illuminated substrate 682 so as to cover these LEDs 681. It is composed of a light diffusing plate 683 provided on the surface of the above, a cover member 684 having translucency, and a non-transmissive member 685 provided at the center of the cover member 684 and having non-translucency. .. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the light diffusing plate 683, the cover member 684, and the like are removed from the members constituting the decorative portion 68A.

As shown in FIG. 4, a driven gear 686 is fixed to the base end portion of the base member 680. The drive unit 68B includes a drive gear 687 and a motor 688 for rotating the drive gear 687 in both directions. As shown in FIG. 12, the drive unit 68B is provided on the upper right side on the back surface of the upper decorative unit 40 when viewed from the player side.

The base member 680 is rotatably supported by a support member (not shown) or the like via a driven gear 686 on the upper right side on the back surface of the upper decorative unit 40 when viewed from the player side. The driven gear 686 is rotatably supported by a support member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the upper decorative unit 40, and is meshed with the drive gear 687. As a result, when the drive gear 687 rotates by a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction, the driven gear 686 rotates by a predetermined angle in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the base member 680 tilts integrally with the cover member 684.

The illumination board 682 has a plurality of LEDs 681 capable of emitting light, blinking, turning off, or increasing or decreasing the brightness in conjunction with the movement of the base member 680 or the like, and is fixed to the base member 680. A light diffusing plate 683 is provided on the surface of the illuminated substrate 682 on which a plurality of LEDs 681 are mounted. The light of the LED 681 travels while being widely diffused from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the cover member 684 via the light diffusing plate 683. Such an LED 681 also belongs to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14), and improves the effect by emitting light or blinking.

The cover member 684 transmits the light guided from the LED 681 through the light diffusing plate 683 and emits it to the outside. However, at the central portion of the cover member 684, the non-transmissive member 685 blocks the light traveling outward. As a result, when viewed from the player side, the central portion of the cover member 684 on which the non-transmissive member 685 is arranged is visually recognized as a non-light emitting region that does not appear to emit light with respect to the peripheral light emitting region. As a result, even if the LED 681 emits light or blinks, a clear projected image can be projected by projecting the projected image described later only on the non-transmissive member 685.

As shown in FIG. 5 (A), such a movable accessory 68 is maintained in a substantially horizontal posture with the decorative portion 68A hidden behind the upper decorative unit 40 in the standby position, while FIG. 5 (A) As shown in B) and FIG. 12, the decorative portion 68A appears in an inclined posture in a state where a part of the decorative portion 68A overlaps with the display area 13a at the appearance position. The effect of the effect is improved by the appearance operation of the movable accessory 68.

[Projector unit]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 12, a projector unit B is provided inside the upper decoration unit 40. The projector unit B is detachably provided with respect to the upper decorative unit 40. As shown in FIG. 11, the projector unit B includes a projector cover B1 that is detachably housed in the upper decoration unit 40, and a projector device main body B2 that is attached to the back of the projector cover B1 and emits irradiation light including an image. , A mirror member B3 that is attached to the front of the projector cover B1 so as to be arranged in front of the projector device main body B2 and reflects the irradiation light from the projector device main body B2 in the direction of the game board 12 arranged diagonally downward and rearward. have. Such a projector unit B functions as a projection means capable of projecting an image as an effect, and realizes so-called projection mapping.

Here, the projection mapping is generally for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. In the present embodiment, in addition to the entire front surface of the game board 12, the decorative member 66A , 66B, 66C, reel accessory 67, and movable accessory 68 are projected, and images are projected based on the production information according to the position (projection distance, projection angle, etc.) and shape, in high definition. It is possible to realize a powerful production display.

The projector device main body B2 is attached to the inner surface of the upper portion of the projector cover B1. The projector device main body B2 is mounted so that the mounting posture and angle can be arbitrarily adjusted. As shown in FIG. 12, the projector device main body B2 emits irradiation light emitted from a light source (not shown) so as to form an image toward the front mirror member B3.

The mirror member B3 is attached to the inner surface of the front portion of the projector cover B1. The mirror member B3 is mounted so that the mounting posture and angle can be adjusted arbitrarily. As shown in FIG. 12, the mirror member B3 reflects the irradiation light from the projector device main body B2 toward the display area 13a and the game area 12a.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the irradiation light emitted from the projector device main body B2 and reflected by the mirror member B3 is applied to the uppermost decorative member 66A, the central decorative member 66B, and the lowermost decorative member 66C. Reach. The projection distance of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66A is La, the projection distance of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66B is Lb, and the irradiation traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66C. Assuming that the light projection distance is Lc, La <Lb <Lc.

Further, the projection angle of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66A with respect to the vertical axis Y is θ1, the projection angle of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66B with respect to the vertical axis Y is θ2, and the projector. Assuming that the projection angle of the irradiation light traveling from the apparatus main body B2 to the decorative member 66C with respect to the vertical axis Y is θ3, θ3 <θ2 <θ1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the projection angle of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66A with respect to the optical axis X is α, and the light of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66B is set to α. Assuming that the projection angle with respect to the axis X is β and the projection angle of the irradiation light traveling from the projector device main body B2 to the decorative member 66C with respect to the optical axis X is γ, α≈β <γ.

As the projection distance of the irradiation light from the projector device main body B2 increases, the incident angle with respect to the front surface (generally the vertical plane) of the game board 12 increases, and the apparent irradiation area increases even with the same luminous intensity, so that the brightness tends to decrease. It becomes. As a result, when considering only the projection distances La, Lb, and Lc, the brightness of the irradiation light increases in the order of the uppermost decorative member 66A, the central decorative member 66B, and the lowermost decorative member 66C. It becomes a tendency.

Further, the irradiation light from the projector device main body B2 tends to decrease in brightness because the apparent irradiation area increases as the projection angle with respect to the vertical axis Y and the projection angle with respect to the optical axis X increase. As a result, the brightness of the irradiation light is determined by comprehensively considering the projection angles θ1 to θ3, α, β, and γ, for example, the uppermost decorative member 66A, the central decorative member 66B, and the lowermost decorative member 66C. The brightness of the irradiation light tends to increase in the order of.

In the present embodiment, the projector unit B emits irradiation light with a uniform amount of light, while the LEDs of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, the reel accessory 67, and the movable accessory 68 are When an image is projected by the irradiation light from the projector unit B, the brightness of the light emission of the LED is appropriately adjusted by the dimming control, or the LED is controlled to be turned off. Further, the irradiation light from the projector unit B also reaches the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, but when an image is projected by the irradiation light with the display area 13a as the projection target, a part of the display area 13a. Alternatively, the entire area is controlled to be black or gray suitable for projection, or the display area 13a is controlled to be black by turning off the drive of the liquid crystal display device 13. These controls will be described later.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming states controlled by the main control circuit 70, which will be described later, include a non-probability / non-time saving game state (a non-probability / non-time saving normal game state) and a winning probability of a special symbol lottery. And the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time saving game state. There are non-probability / time-saving gaming states (non-probability-changing and time-saving gaming states) that are higher than the above, and if a special symbol lottery is won in these gaming states, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state (special game). In addition, the game state may shift to the small hit game state based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, there is no probabilistic / non-time saving gaming state (probability / non-time saving gaming state), but a probabilistic / non-time saving gaming state may be provided.

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the normal electric accessory 46 facilitates the winning of the second starting port 45. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 45. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 is relatively long (time saving game state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the so-called V prize is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the state always shifts to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state, and does not shift to the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends as it is without succeeding in V winning (also referred to as non-V winning), the game state shifts to the non-probability variable gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It has become like.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state, for example, 190 times of special symbol lottery (190 times of change display or stop display of special symbols) is performed in the probability change / time saving game state, and the game is not displayed. It is designed to shift to a probabilistic / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of change display or stop display of special symbol) was performed in the non-probability change / time saving game state. , It is designed to shift to a non-probability / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered. The probabilistic gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly controls a game operation, a main control circuit 70, a payout / launch control circuit 123, and a sub-control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game. (Production control means).

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a one-chip microcomputer 77, a clock generation circuit 74, and an initial reset circuit 75. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed at the time of winning the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

The one-chip microcomputer 77 is composed of a main CPU 71, a main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, and a serial communication unit 76. The main CPU 71, the main ROM 72, the main RAM 73, and the serial communication unit 76 may be provided separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main ROM 72 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 70 will be described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a ROM board on which the main ROM 72 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 70. Further, in the present embodiment, the various circuits in the main control circuit 70 may be integrally formed or may be formed as separate bodies. Further, the main ROM 72 does not have to be installed in the game machine, and may have a structure capable of communicating with the game machine.

A clock generation circuit 74 and an initial reset circuit 75 are connected to the one-chip microcomputer 77. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the main CPU 71 for the various processes are stored. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as the temporary storage medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. ..

The clock generation circuit 74 generates clock pulses at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication unit 76 supplies a command to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, various devices that operate in response to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. To. Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, the first special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state. Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b, respectively, to open or close the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals of the various sensors. Specifically, the count sensors 53c and 54c, the general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, the passing ball sensor 43a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, and the like are connected to the main control circuit 70. Will be done.

The count sensor 53c counts the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54c counts the game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 51, the general winning ball sensor 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70, and the general winning ball sensor 52a wins the game ball in the general winning opening 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

Further, the passing ball sensor 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first starting port winning ball sensor 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the first starting port 44. The second starting port winning ball sensor 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45. Further, a backup clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main control circuit 70, and this backup clear switch is used when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the administrator of the amusement store or the like at the time of power failure or the like. , A predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 123.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 123 is connected to the main control circuit 70. The contents of the payout / launch control circuit 123 and various peripheral devices connected thereto will be described in detail later.

[Payout / launch control circuit and its peripherals]
The payout / launch control circuit 123 is connected to the prize ball case unit 170, the payout status notification display device 178, the lower plate full tank switch 179, the launcher 15, the external terminal plate 140, and the card unit 150. Further, the external terminal plate 140 is connected to the data display 141, and the card unit 150 is connected to the rental operation unit 151.

The payout / launch control circuit 123 inputs and outputs signals and the like to and from these peripheral devices based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 70, and controls the operation of each peripheral device. For example, the payout / launch control circuit 123 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a ball rental control signal to be described later transmitted from the card unit 150, and is predetermined to the prize ball case unit 170. Send a signal. As a result, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out the game ball.

The prize ball case unit 170 is a device for paying out game balls, and is a first 15-ball mortgage switch 172a, a second 15-ball mortgage switch 172b, a first counting switch 181a, a second counting switch 181b, and a payout. It has a motor 174. These components included in the prize ball case unit 170 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 123, respectively.

Further, although not shown here, two ball supply passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172a detects the game ball supplied to one of the ball supply passages, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. Further, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172b detects the game ball supplied to the other ball supply passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

Further, although not shown here, two payout passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first counting switch 181a detects the game ball paid out in one of the payout passages, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. Further, the second counting switch 181b detects the game ball paid out in the other payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

The payout motor 174 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven in response to a control signal input from the payout / launch control circuit 123. The payout motor 174 rotationally drives a sprocket (rotating member) (not shown) provided in the prize ball case unit 170. Then, by the rotational operation of the sprocket, the game balls accumulated in each ball supply path move one by one to the corresponding payout passage.

The payout status notification display device 178 is a device for notifying the type of the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the payout of the game ball, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The payout status notification display device 178 is attached at a position so that only the administrator of the game store (game hall) can see it, and is attached to, for example, a predetermined position on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the lower plate full tank switch 179 is full, the lower plate full tank switch 179 detects when the game ball stored in the lower plate 22 is full, and outputs the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

When a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is input from the lower plate full tank switch 179, the payout / launch control circuit 123 notifies the payout status notification display device 178 that the lower plate is full. In addition to notifying by using, a signal indicating that the lower plate is full is output to the main control circuit 70. After that, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 fills the lower plate 22 with, for example, a speaker 11, a lamp / LED group 18, a liquid crystal display device 13, and the like. Notify that it is in a tongue state.

The launching device 15 has a launching handle 25 that can be rotated by the player when launching the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 21 into the gaming area 12a. The payout / launch control circuit 123 is attached to a solenoid actuator (not shown) of the launch device 15 according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 25 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Supply power. As a result, the launching device 15 launches the game ball. As the driving means of the launching device 15, a motor may be used instead of the solenoid actuator.

The external terminal plate 140 is used for transmitting data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the game store. The data display 141 is installed on the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as ancillary equipment of a game store, and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 150 to rent the game ball. The card unit 150 determines the number of game balls (number of balls to be rented) to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170 based on a signal output from the rental operation unit 151 requesting the rental of game balls. Then, when the card unit 150 receives the signal requesting the rental of the game ball from the rental operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits the rental ball control signal including the information on the determined number of rental balls to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 200 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 70, and includes a sub CPU 81, a program ROM 82, a work RAM 83, a command input port 84, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, "" It has an (RTC: Real-Time Clock) 85, a display control circuit 86, a voice control circuit 87, a lamp control circuit 88, an effect operation control circuit 89, and a projector control circuit 90. A liquid crystal display device 13 is connected to the display control circuit 86. A speaker 11 is connected to the voice control circuit 87. A lamp / LED group 18 is connected to the lamp control circuit 88. A reel accessory 67, a movable accessory 68, and the like are connected to the effect operation control circuit 89 as an accessory effect device. The projector device main body B2 is connected to the projector control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 81 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 82. The liquid crystal display device 13 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 81 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 70.

The program ROM 82 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 81 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 83 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 81.

The command input port 84 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 and transmits them to the sub CPU 81.

The RTC85 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time to the sub CPU 81. Normally, the RTC85 operates by the power supply from the game machine main body when the power is supplied to the game machine main body, and when the power of the game machine main body is turned off, the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board (not shown). Operated by the power supplied from. As a result, the RTC85 can clock the current date and time even when the power of the game machine main body is turned off. The RTC85 may be operated by a battery provided on the sub-control circuit. Further, as an alternative to the RTC85, a counter provided in the work RAM having a function as a backup RAM may be used as a means for measuring the time by counting up at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms).

The display control circuit 86 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 13 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 81, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 86 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 86 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 81. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 86 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. A liquid crystal image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 87 is for controlling voice and the like generated from the speaker 11, for example, a sound source IC for controlling voice and the like, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and a voice signal for amplifying. Includes an amplifier (AMP). The configuration of the voice control circuit 87 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the voice generated from the speaker 11, and selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 81. can do.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the voice signal to the amplifier. It should be noted that this amplifier amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 11.

The lamp control circuit 88 is for controlling the lamp / LED group 18 including the LEDs of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, and is a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal and a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns. It is composed of a decorative data ROM or the like in which is stored. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 88 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The effect operation control circuit 89 controls the effect operation such as operating the movable accessory 68 by operating the effect button 23 or the like during the valid period of the operation in the jackpot game state, for example.

The projector control circuit 90 is for performing LED control, focus control, image processing, and the like of the projector device main body B2. As shown in FIG. 15, the projector device main body B2 includes a projector control circuit 90, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components.

The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the projector device main body B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 according to the effect operation of the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68, and the like, and projects the irradiation light toward the front surface of the game board 12 via the optical mechanism B24. By doing so, the image is displayed as a visual effect.

The optical mechanism B24 includes an LED light source, a DMD, and a projection lens of the lens unit that emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) colored lights as components arranged around the lens unit (not shown). A focus mechanism (not shown) for adjusting the focus is provided.

The projector control circuit 90 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233.

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control circuit 200. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens (not shown) in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub-control circuit 200 to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device main body B2.

The DLP system of the projector device main body B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver, an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24, and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction travels to the lens unit (not shown), passes through the projection lens (not shown), and is incident on the mirror member B3, and finally the mirror. It is guided to the front surface of the game board 12 by being reflected by the member B3. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68, and the like to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device main body B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device main body B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror member B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. I have to. As a result, the projector unit B provided with the projector device main body B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily accommodated in the limited space inside the upper decorative unit 40.

[Communication operation of control circuit]
Next, the communication operation between the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the voice / lamp control circuits 87 and 88, the display control circuit 86, and the projector control circuit 90 will be described with reference to FIG. The voice / lamp control circuits 87 and 88 are merely a description of the voice control circuit 87 and the lamp control circuit 88, but these circuits may actually be integrally formed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the main control circuit 70 supplies various commands to the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70, selects an effect type according to the command, and based on the selected effect, each effect device (for example, decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, combination). Select the control data of the reel accessory 67 and the movable accessory 68 as the object effect device, the liquid crystal display device 13, the projector device main body B2, etc.), and set the control data to be transmitted to each effect device in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. ..

The sub-control circuit 200 controls the operations of the accessory effect devices 67 and 68 based on the control data for each effect device. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 transmits a lamp request for controlling the lamp / LED group 18 and a sound request for driving and controlling the speaker 11 to the voice / lamp control circuits 87 and 88, and the liquid crystal display device 13 A drawing request for controlling the projector device main body B2 and a drawing request for controlling the projector device main body B2 are transmitted to the projector control circuit 90. As a result, the operations of the accessory effect devices 67 and 68 are controlled by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, the light emitting operation of the lamp / LED group 18 is controlled by the lamp control circuit 88, and the sound output operation of the speaker 11 is voice controlled. Controlled by the circuit 87, the image display operation of the liquid crystal display device 13 is controlled by the display control circuit 86, and the video output operation of the projector device main body B2 is controlled by the projector control circuit 90.

[Processing by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 34.

[Main control circuit main processing]
17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the main control circuit main processing executed by the main CPU 71. This main control circuit main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 17, in S10, the main CPU 71 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 71 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 71 performs the sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch is ON, the process is transferred to S24, and when it is determined that the backup clear switch is not ON, the process is transferred to S16.

In S16, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S17, and if it is determined that there is no power failure detection flag, the process is transferred to S24.

In S17, the main CPU 71 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process is transferred to S19, and when it is determined that the work damage check value is not a normal value, the process is transferred to S24. ..

In S19, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 71 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 71 performs a high-probability game state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 71 makes a display notifying that the winning probability of the big hit is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 71 performs initial settings for devices around the main CPU 71. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 returns to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

In S24, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 71 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S27 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, in S27, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S28.

In S28, the main CPU 71 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 73 to the sub-control circuit 200. In the sub control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on a command received by the sub CPU 81. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S30.

In S30, the main CPU 71 performs initial settings for CPU peripheral devices. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 71 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 71 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 71 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S36 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not the above, the process is transferred to S31.

In S36, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 71 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 71 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200, and the opening time of the big winning opening that opens when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 71 to the hall computer etc. via the external terminal board 140 when it is detected that there is an illegal operation, etc. , Executes the process of updating various timers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start port winning ball sensor 44a and the second start port winning ball sensor 45a, and stores them in the main ROM 72. With reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 73. This special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 71 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value according to the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 43a, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 72 in the main ROM 72. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 72. Based on (not shown), it is determined whether to use a lost diagram or a hit symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the ordinary electric accessory 46 opens and closes according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 46 is opened, and when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is opened, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 45. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sends a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 13 to the main RAM 73 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform the process of memorizing. The main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62. The special symbol display device 61 variablely displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display device 62 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates game information data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the hall computer or the data display 141, and performs a process of storing the game information data in the main RAM 73. This game information data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol hold quantity data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 71 is the first start port detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S241 and S242 in FIG. 31) in the switch input process of the system timer interrupt process described later. Detected signals from the winning ball sensor 44a, the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, and the passing ball sensor 43a, and the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 73 that is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. Based on the update result of, the main RAM 73 stores the control signal for driving the first special symbol hold display device 64, the second special symbol hold display device 65, and the normal symbol hold display device 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 71 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 73 from each port by each of the above processes. Specifically, the main CPU 71 outputs a security signal to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal plate 140, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, and a shutter 53a and a second of the first grand prize opening 53. It supplies solenoid power for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the shutter 54a of the grand prize opening 54 and opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 46. This port output process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 71 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 71 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the first large winning opening 53, the second large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 50, 51. When the check is performed and a prize is won, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 123. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 19, the numerical values shown on the sides of S51 to S58 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the first S50, the main CPU 71 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S51.

In S51 to S58, which will be described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S51 to S58 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 71 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 71 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 71 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S51, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol memory check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 71 executes the special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control status flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S53 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The special symbol fluctuation time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the confirmation. When the main CPU 71 is a big hit or a small hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S54 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S58. The special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S54.

In S54, the main CPU 71 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the second grand prize read from the main ROM 72 Drive control data related to a round opening / closing pattern for opening the shutter 54a of the mouth 54 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 of FIG. 18, the main CPU 71 reads out the drive control data related to the round opening / closing pattern for opening the shutter 54a of the second special winning opening 54 stored in the main RAM 73, and reads out the drive control data related to the round opening / closing pattern. A signal to open / close the shutter 54a of the 54 is supplied to the second large winning opening solenoid 54b. As a result, the main CPU 71 controls the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 54. That is, the hit game state in which one round game in which a predetermined advantageous game state is provided is repeated a predetermined number of times is executed. The hit start interval management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S55. In this case, a small hit game state in which only the second large winning opening 54 opens and closes only once may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the second prize opening 54 is always opened and closed first, but the first prize opening 53 may be opened and closed first, or the first first prize opening 53 may be opened and closed first. The large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

In S55, the main CPU 71 executes the large winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time in the large winning opening opening time timer. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S56.

In S56, the main CPU 71 executes the waiting time management process before opening the big winning opening. In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before opening the large winning opening, and is large when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern x, y) has elapsed. The memory is updated so that the winning opening opening count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the process of S55 is set to be executed again. The waiting time management process before opening the large winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S57.

In S57, the main CPU 71 executes the hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S58. The hit end interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S58.

In S58, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S51. The special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this process is completed, the special symbol control process routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the main CPU 71 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ) And (07H) in this order, the processes of S51, S52, S53, and S58 shown in FIG. 19 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 71 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. ), The processes of S51, S52, and S53 shown in FIG. 19 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H), so that FIG. 19 shows. The processes of S54, S55, and S56 shown above are executed at predetermined timings, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is satisfied, the processes of S55, S57, and S58 shown in FIG. 19 are performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 20, in S60, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S61. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S61, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S62. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S63.

In S62, the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 73. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Further, the image for demo display is projected from the projector device main body B2 onto the front surface of the game board 12. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S63, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S64. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S65 Move the process to.

In S64, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S65, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S68.

In S68, the main CPU 71 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probabilistic game state, that is, when the game state is the probabilistic game state as a game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the game state shifts to the big hit game state. The probability of playing is higher than that of the non-probability game state in which it is difficult to shift to the jackpot game state than the probability change game state.

Then, the main CPU 71 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 71 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 44 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 45. The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 44 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 45.

As described above, in the processing of S68, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S69.

In S69, the main CPU 71 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S68 that the big hit has not been won. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the game state flag.

Then, the main CPU 71 sets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area extracted at the time of winning the game ball and set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 71 determines that the hit is a small hit.

Since the small hit can be generated only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination process is performed only based on the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area. 1 The small hit determination process may be performed based on the hit determination random value stored in the special symbol start storage area.

As described above, in the processing of S69, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and when neither the big hit determination processing of S68 nor the small hit determination processing of S69 is won, the special symbol is selected. Loss will be decided as the judgment result of the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S70.

In S70, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, and for either the big hit or the small hit. In the case of loss, the process of determining the loss pattern is performed. The special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 is different based on the special symbol determined in the process of S70, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S68 and S69, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern. Then, the main CPU 71 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Here, the probabilistic game state and the normal game state have different fluctuation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on the data indicated by the variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, in the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol is variablely displayed in the determined variable pattern. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol fluctuation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 81 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 21, in S90, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S91. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S96.

In S91, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S90 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the variation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S92 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the main CPU 71, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, that is, the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S94.

In S92, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is displaced based on the hit symbol determination random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 71 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variablely displays the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S99.

In S94, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining one of the jackpot symbols of the second special symbol based on the hit symbol determination random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 71 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S99.

In S96, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the result determined by the small hit determination process (S69 in FIG. 20) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S97 if a small hit is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S101 if the small hit is not won.

In S97, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the hit symbol determination random value and the small hit determination table extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 71 performs a data set of the determined small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 71 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 71 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 71 receives data related to the number of times the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54 are opened, that is, the winning symbol by the first special symbol or the winning symbol by the second special symbol. The process of setting the data corresponding to the symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 73 is performed. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S101, when it is determined that the main CPU 71 is neither a big hit in S90 nor a small hit in S96, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 22, in S110, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 71 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S112. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S112, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. Then, the special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol display time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S120, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S121. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S121, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display time management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S122. On the other hand, if the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S124.

In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S123. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 71 is not a big hit, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S131. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S130. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 71 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S128. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S130.

In S128, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the time saving number of times flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a time-saving end command indicating the end of the time-saving game state in the main RAM 73. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S130. Although not particularly shown, the main CPU 71 performs the same processing on the probability variation count counter, and when the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the probability variation number flag is cleared to indicate the end of the probability variation game state. It is configured to perform a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command in the main RAM 73. The probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the probability change game state.

In S130, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a small hit, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S136.

In S131, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting "FFH" in the main RAM 73 as the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S134. Here, setting "FFH" as the value of the large winning opening opening count counter corresponds to setting "-1".

In S134, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit or small hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state and a specific hit opening / closing pattern. The sub CPU 81 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the data indicating the hit open / close pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S136, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S137.

In S136, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 71. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S140, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S141. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 71 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S141, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S142. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S142, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining a hit opening / closing pattern with reference to a hit type determination table (not shown). In this process, the main CPU 71 sets (stores) the data of the hit opening / closing pattern indicating the big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 performs round control based on the hit opening / closing pattern according to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S142. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and shifts the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the waiting time after the determination of the big hit or the small hit in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S148.

In S148, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S149.

In S149, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S150.

In S150, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the data of the first round opening / closing pattern in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 performs round control based on the round opening / closing pattern set in S150. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to open the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54. The variable stored in this way drives the first special winning opening solenoid 53b or the second special winning opening solenoid 54b to open the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated.

[Large winning opening opening process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 71. This large winning opening opening process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 25, in S160, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process is transferred to S161. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 71 ends the large winning opening opening processing routine.

In S161, the main CPU 71 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process according to the set round opening / closing pattern. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first special winning opening solenoid 53b or the second special winning opening solenoid 54b. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S168. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the process to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 71 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R. When the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S168. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or more than the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 71 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern table (not shown) and the interval time table (not shown), and sets the value of the waiting time timer as the closing time according to the interval pattern between the corresponding rounds. The process of setting in the main RAM 73 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before opening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the large winning opening opening process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S168, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S169.

In S169, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S170.

In S170, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol hit interval end display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process is completed, the large winning opening opening process routine is terminated.

[Large prize opening and closing process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a large prize opening / closing process executed by the main CPU 71. This grand prize opening / closing process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 71 refers to a large winning opening opening / closing pattern table (not shown) and performs a process of acquiring a round opening / closing pattern to be executed at present. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the control sequence counter and the repetitive counting counter. The control sequence counter is a counter for specifying the control sequence of the basic open / close pattern included in the round open / close pattern. The repetitive counting counter is a counter for counting the number of times the basic opening / closing pattern is repeatedly executed. In the round opening / closing pattern, the control order and the number of repetitions are specified for each basic opening / closing pattern, and a numerical value indicating the final order among these control orders is specified as the initial value of the control order counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the basic opening / closing pattern and the number of repetitions of the first control order in the main RAM 73. The number of repetitions is set in the repetition count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 71 controls to open and close the large winning opening based on the basic opening / closing pattern defined in the round opening / closing pattern. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is 10 or more. When the value of the big prize opening winning counter is 10 or more, the main CPU 71 ends the big winning opening / closing processing routine. On the other hand, when the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not 10 or more (less than 10), the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S185.

In S185, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to end the open / close control related to this round. When the main CPU 71 ends the open / close control related to this round, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S186. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 does not end the open / close control related to this round, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S183.

In S186, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the repetitive counting counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S187.

In S187, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the repetitive counting counter is 0. When the value of the repeat count counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S188. On the other hand, when the value of the repeat count counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S183.

In S188, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the control sequence counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S189.

In S189, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the control sequence counter is 0. When the value of the control order counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the big prize opening / closing processing routine. On the other hand, if the value of the control sequence counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S190.

In S190, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the basic opening / closing pattern and the number of repetitions of the corresponding control order based on the value of the control order counter. When this process is completed, the grand prize opening / closing process routine is terminated.

[Waiting time management process before opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before opening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 71. This waiting time management process before opening the big prize opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before opening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before opening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening of the big winning opening, the main CPU 71 ends the waiting time management processing routine before opening of the big winning opening.

In S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the interval time timer corresponding to the inter-round interval is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the interval time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the interval time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the waiting time management processing routine before opening the large winning opening.

In S202, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the data of the corresponding round opening / closing pattern in the main RAM 73 based on the value of the large winning opening opening / closing counter and the large winning opening opening / closing pattern table (not shown). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S204.

In S204, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The command data for displaying the opening of the large winning opening in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S206.

In S206, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S207. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S208.

In S207, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S208.

In S208, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before opening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval process executed by the main CPU 71. This hit end interval processing is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 28, in S210, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the main CPU 71 ends the hit end interval processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S212. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the hit end interval processing routine.

In S212, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 73 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the drive control data according to the game state in the predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the hit end interval processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 29, in S220, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S221, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S221.

In S222, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a special symbol per end command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol per end command indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73. Then, the special symbol hit end command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[System timer interrupt processing by the main CPU]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 71. This system timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This system timer interrupt process is executed according to the clock pulse generated from the clock generation circuit 74 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms).

As shown in FIG. 30, in S230, the main CPU 71 performs a register save process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S231.

In S231, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the system timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75. The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 75 to the main CPU 71 A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters the system reset state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 71 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S234, the main CPU 71 performs a switch input process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not each sensor corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. When, for example, the main CPU 71 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". This switch input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 71 performs fraud detection processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of detecting an illegal operation based on, for example, a vibration detection signal from a vibration detection sensor (not shown). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 71 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, the system timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 71. This switch input process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 31, in S240, the main CPU 71 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, and the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a have been input. When it is determined that the general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a have been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a or the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a is subjected to the process. When it is determined that there is an input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the start opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing ball sensor 43a, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the number of reserved balls is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Performs the process of storing in the symbol storage area. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 71 performs an abnormality-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the signal from the abnormality-related switch such as the open / close switch (not shown) of the glass door 4. For example, when it is detected that the glass door 4 is open based on the signal from the open / close switch of the glass door 4, a process for notifying the abnormality is performed, and when the abnormality is not detected, S244 is performed. Move the process.

In S244, the main CPU 71 performs a launch-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for controlling the launch operation based on, for example, a signal from the touch sensor of the launch device 15. When this processing is completed, the switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 32, in S250, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a. Perform processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the bit of the first start opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a is "1 (ON)", and the first If the bit of the start opening winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S251, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the process is processed to S257. To move.

In S251, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the special symbol-related switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start storages of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 71 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the first starting port 44 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S254.

In S254, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 71 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 71 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S255 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this processing is completed, the special symbol-related switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S257, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 45 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the bit of the second start opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a is "1 (ON)", and the second If the bit of the start opening winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S258, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the special symbol is related. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S258, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the special symbol-related switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 71 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 45 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random value of is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 71 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 71 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The start winning command is as described above. When this processing is completed, the special symbol-related switch check processing routine is terminated.

[Game information data generation process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a game information data generation process executed by the main CPU 71. This game information data generation process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S300, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the security signal output flag is on. When the main CPU 71 determines that the security signal output flag is on, the processing is transferred to S301, and when it is determined that the security signal output flag is not on, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S304.

In S301, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the security signal output flag to off. In this process, the main CPU 71 turns off the security signal output flag that is turned on. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the minimum output period in the security signal output timer. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the security signal output timer for a minimum output period of 60 s, which is the output time of the security signal. The time set in the security signal output timer can be changed to any time other than 60s. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting security signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a security signal and sets the security signal. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S306.

In S304, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the security signal output timer is 0. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the security signal output timer is 0, and if it determines that the value of the security signal output timer is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S305 and performs a security signal. If it is determined that the value of the output timer is not 0, the process is transferred to S310.

In S305, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the security signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 clears the security signal output data. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub-illegal signal output flag is on. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub-illegal signal output flag is on, and if it determines that the sub-illegal signal output flag is on, shifts the process to S307 and outputs the sub-illegal signal. If it is determined that the flag is not on, the process is transferred to S310.

In S307, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the sub-illegal signal output flag to off. In this process, the main CPU 71 turns off the sub-illegal signal output flag that is turned on. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S308.

In S308, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the minimum output period in the sub-illegal signal output timer. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the sub-illegal signal output timer with a minimum transmission period of 30 s, which is a transmission time of a command indicating an illegal operation. The time set in the sub-illegal signal output timer can be changed to any time other than 30s. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S309.

In S309, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a sub-illegal signal as output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a command indicating an illegal operation as a sub-illegal signal, and sets the command as a transmission command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the game information data generation process routine.

In S310, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer is 0. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer is 0, and if it determines that the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer is 0, the process is transferred to S311. If it is determined that the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer is not 0, the game information data generation processing routine is terminated.

In S311 the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the sub-illegal signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 clears a transmission command indicating an illegal operation as sub-illegal signal output data. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the game information data generation process routine.

By such processing, the main CPU 71 sets the security signal output data unless the value of the security signal output timer is 0, and unless the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer is 0, the main CPU 71 performs an illegal operation as the sub-illegal signal output data. It is configured to set the indicated send command. As a result, the main CPU 71 continuously outputs the security signal to the outside until the value of the security signal output timer becomes 0, and continuously exhibits an illegal operation until the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer becomes 0. The transmission command is transmitted to the sub CPU 81.

[Port output processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the port output process executed by the main CPU 71. This port output process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S320, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the security signal output data is set. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the security signal output data is set, the process is transferred to S321, and when it is determined that the security signal output data is not set, the process is performed in S322. Move.

In S321, the main CPU 71 performs security signal output processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of externally outputting the set security signal output data. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to S322 for the process.

In S322, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub-illegal signal output data is set. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that a transmission command indicating an illegal operation is set as the sub-illegal signal output data, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S323 and a transmission command indicating an illegal operation as the sub-illegal signal output data. If it is determined that is not set, the port output processing routine is terminated.

In S323, the main CPU 71 performs a sub-illegal signal output process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a transmission command indicating an illegal operation as a set sub-illegal signal. When this processing is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the port output processing routine.

[Processing by sub CPU]
Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39. The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes such as accessory control processing.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a sub control circuit main process executed by the sub CPU 81. This sub-control circuit main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S330, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of clearing the watchdog counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 81 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 83. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S333.

In S333, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of selecting the type and content of the effect based on the command received from the main control circuit 70. This effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S334.

In S334, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the processing for the received command has been completed. In this process, when it is determined that the process for the received command is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S335. If it is determined that the processing for the received command has not been completed, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S332.

In S335, the sub CPU 81 performs drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 transmits a drawing request for performing drawing display in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 86. The display control circuit 86 including the VDP reads various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and production image data from the image data ROM based on a drawing request from the sub CPU 81, superimposes the data, and displays the liquid crystal. It is displayed in the display area 13a of the display device 13. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S336.

In S336, the sub CPU 81 performs projector control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 transmits a drawing request for emitting irradiation light including an image to the projector device main body B2 to the projector control circuit 90. The projector control circuit 90 including the DLP control circuit 232 reads various video data from the ROM for projected video based on the drawing request from the sub CPU 81, and emits irradiation light so as to project the video on the front surface of the game board 12. Make it emit. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the sub CPU 81 performs voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a voice control process for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 11 via the voice control circuit 87. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S338.

In S338, the sub CPU 81 performs the lamp control process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 controls the light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED group 18 included in the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68, etc. via the lamp control circuit 88. Execute the lamp control process. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S339.

In S339, the sub CPU 81 performs the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes the accessory operation control process for controlling the operation of the reel accessory 67 and the movable accessory 68 via the effect operation control circuit 89. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 repeats the processes of S332 to S339 thereafter.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 81 may interrupt the sub control circuit main process and execute a timer interrupt process or a command interrupt process, which will be described later, even when the sub control circuit main process is being executed. Hereinafter, a timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 36, and a command interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 81. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S340, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S341.

In S341, the sub CPU 81 performs various timer update processes. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S342.

In S342, the sub CPU 81 performs the button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of an operation input by the effect button 23 or the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of returning the program saved in S340 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Command interrupt processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 81. This command interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S350, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of storing the received command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of storing the command transmitted and received from the main CPU 71 in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 83. For example, the sub CPU 81 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process shown in S332 of FIG. 35. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S352.

In S352, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of returning the program saved in S350 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Production selection process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an effect selection process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect selection process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S360, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to an effect selection table (not shown) based on the command received from the main control circuit 70, and determines the type of effect to be executed based on the specified contents of the effect selection table. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S361.

In S361, the sub CPU 81 performs the effect suppression process. This effect suppression process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process is finished, the effect selection process routine is finished.

[Direction suppression processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect suppressing process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect suppression process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 39, in S370, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a lightning projection image is selected as an example of the image projected from the projector device main body B2 based on the effect determined by the previous effect determination process. To do. As shown in FIG. 40 (C) or FIG. 41 (B), the lightning projection image is an image imitating lightning projected on a part of the decorative portion 68A or the display area 13a in conjunction with the operation of the movable accessory 68. Is. When the lightning projection image is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S371. When the lightning projection image is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S371, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the premier display effect is selected as the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 13. The premier-type display effect means that the effect of the liquid crystal image displayed on the display area 12a suggesting a big hit or the like is performed infrequently, but when it is executed, the expectation of the big hit or the like increases. When the premier display effect is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S372. If the premier display effect is not selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S373.

In S372, the sub CPU 81 sets the data for stopping the projection of the lightning projection image in the predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector device main body B2 so as not to project a lightning projection image when executing a premier display effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

In S373, the sub CPU 81 sets the control data for making the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 a uniform black color suitable for the lightning projection image in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 so that the display area 13a is uniformly black when projecting a lightning projection image. In order to make the display area 13a uniform black, a liquid crystal image that is entirely black may be displayed over the entire display area 13a, or the liquid crystal display device 13 may be turned off and stopped to drive the display area. 13a may be set to black as a so-called normally black mode. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the effect operation of the movable accessory 68 is selected. In the effect operation of the movable accessory 68, the decorative portion 68A moves from the standby position to the operation position that overlaps with the display area 13a. When the effect operation of the movable accessory 68 is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S375. If the effect operation of the movable accessory 68 is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S375, the sub CPU 81 sets data for lowering the brightness of the LED 681 in the decorative portion 68A in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, when the sub CPU 81 projects the lightning projection image and moves the decoration unit 68A to the operation position overlapping the display area 13a, the sub CPU 81 projects the lightning projection image and does not project the lightning projection image. The brightness of the LED 681 is reduced by a predetermined amount. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

[Production operation example]
FIGS. 40 to 45 show an example of the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The effect operation will be described below with reference to these figures.

40 (A) to 40 (C) show the effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image, and the projected image. Note that FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C) show a state in which the upper decorative unit 40 is removed, and in a state where the upper decorative unit 40 is attached, for example, in the standby state of FIG. 40 (A), a movable combination is used. The object 68 cannot actually be seen by the upper decoration unit 40. Further, FIG. 40C shows an inappropriate example when projecting a projected image.

First, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the movable accessory 68 is in the standby position, the liquid crystal image is displayed in the display area 13a without the decorative portion 68A overlapping the display area 13a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), when the movable accessory 68 moves from the standby position to the appearance position, the decorative portion 68A overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. In such a state, the LED 681 of the decorative portion 68A is made to emit light or blink at a predetermined brightness (collectively referred to as "light emission effect"). As a result, the player becomes interested in the light emitting effect 681A along with the movement of the decorative portion 68A, and the visual effect is enhanced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), due to the irradiation light from the projector device main body B2 (not shown in the figure), for example, a part of the game area 12a around which the lightning projection image 500 is centered on the decorative portion 68A It is projected to a part of the display area 13a. That is, although the main portion 510 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed in the decorative portion 68A, the remaining part 520 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed in a part of the game area 12a and the lightning projection image 500. The other portion 530 of the above is formed in a part of the display area 13a. Such a lightning projection image 500 may appear to overlap a liquid crystal image of a character or the like (not shown) in the display area 13a.

At this time, if the light emission effect 681A by the LED 681 has the predetermined brightness described above, the light of the main portion 510 of the lightning projection image 500 formed on the decorative portion 68A and the light of the light emission effect 681A are mixed with each other to produce the lightning projection image. It becomes easy to visually recognize the 500 as if it were white and blurred. Further, the other part 530 of the lightning projection image 500 overlaps with the liquid crystal image (not shown) of the display area 13a, so that the color tone of the lightning projection image 500 is distorted and it becomes easy to be visually recognized as if it is blurred. As a result, the color development of the lightning projection image 500 becomes low, and the lightning projection image 500 becomes unclear. The reason why the lightning projection image 500 becomes unclear is that the lightning projection image 500 is formed by synthesizing the light of each RGB color, and the light of the lightning projection image 500 and the light of the light emission effect 681A and the light of the liquid crystal image. It is thought that this is because the lightness of a specific color is strengthened by the additive color mixing. In order to prevent such blurring of the image, in the present embodiment, the means described below are taken.

FIG. 41 (A) shows a state in which the lightning projection image 500 is projected around the decorative portion 68A to the periphery thereof, and FIG. 41 (B) shows the decorative portion 68A and the lightning projection image 500 in the state of FIG. 41 (A). It shows the state where and is abbreviated.

As shown in FIG. 41 (A), in the lightning projection image 500, as in FIG. 40 (C), the main portion 510 is formed in the decorative portion 68A, and the remaining portion 520 is a part of the game area 12a. It is formed, and the remaining portion 530 is formed in a part of the display area 13a.

At this time, the LED 681 of the decorative portion 68A is temporarily stopped from emitting light or blinking, so that the light emitting effect is temporarily stopped. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), in the display area 13a, from the area overlapping with the lightning projection image 500 to the area where the other part 530 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed, for example, one of black or gray in gray scale. A liquid crystal image 300 having a similar display color is formed. The liquid crystal image 300 having such a display color exhibits a color tone suitable for the projection mapping image.

That is, in the states shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 41 (B), the lightning projection image 500 is not mixed with the light of the light emission effect, and the lightning projection image 500 is not visually recognized as white and blurred. .. Further, although the other part 530 of the lightning projection image 500 overlaps with the liquid crystal image 300, the color tone of the lightning projection image 500 is not disturbed because the liquid crystal image 300 itself emits dark light or no light at all. That is, the light of the lightning projection image 500, the light of the light emission effect, and the light of the liquid crystal image 300 are not mixed or are weak even if they are mixed, so that the brightness of the specific color is not enhanced. Therefore, even if the lightning projection image 500 is projected onto the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 that overlaps with the display area 13a, a clear image can be projected without causing blurring in the entire lightning projection image 500.

When the lightning projection image 500 is projected onto the decoration portion 68A of the movable accessory 68, the LED 681 of the decoration portion 68A is provided as long as the light of the light emission effect 681A does not affect the clarity of the lightning projection image 500. May be emitted or blinked at a brightness lower than a predetermined brightness. Further, the display area 13a may display the liquid crystal image 300 such that the entire area is black or gray due to gray scale. Further, the display area 13a may be turned black in the normally black mode by driving and stopping the liquid crystal display device 13 with the power turned off.

42 (A) to 42 (C) show the effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image, and the projected image. As the liquid crystal image, a shield liquid crystal image 310 imitating a shield and a star pattern 320 showing glitter are displayed in the display area 13a. As the projected image, crack projected images 540 and 550 showing cracks are projected.

First, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the shield liquid crystal image 310 is displayed in the display area 13a and the decorative portion 68A moves from the standby position to the appearance position, the decorative portion 68A moves the shield of the display area 13a. It is in a state of overlapping with a part of the liquid crystal image 310. In such a state, the LED 681 of the decorative portion 68A is stopped from emitting light or blinking as described above, or the brightness can be reduced. At this time, the crack projection image 540 may be projected on the decoration portion 68A. The crack projection image 540 of the decorative portion 68A appears as an effect suggesting a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42B, after that, the decorative portion 68A erases the crack projection image 540 while overlapping a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310. At this time, the star pattern 320 is displayed in a part of the display area 13a that cannot be seen from the front of the player because it overlaps with the decorative portion 68A. Although the star pattern 320 is a liquid crystal image and cannot be seen by the player located in front of the star pattern 320, it can be visually recognized by wrapping around to the side of the decorative portion 68A and looking through the gap between the decorative portion 68A and the display area 13a. It is said that. Such a star pattern 320 can be visually recognized only by looking into it after the appearance of the crack projection image 540 suggesting a disadvantageous gaming state, and the gaming state considered to be disadvantageous to the player is actually an advantageous gaming state. It appears as a so-called reversal effect that suggests that.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), in the display area 13a, the crack projection image 550 is projected so as to overlap the shield liquid crystal image 310. At this time, in the display area 13a, the area where the crack projection image 550 is projected (a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310) is a uniform gray color, for example, black or gray scale so that a clear image can be projected. Partially formed as a display color area. The crack projection image 550 formed on the shield liquid crystal image 310 appears as an effect suggesting a game state advantageous to the player. A projected image imitating a shield may be projected on the display area 13a instead of the shield liquid crystal image 310. Further, if the star pattern 320 or the crack projection image 550 appears, not all of them are in an advantageous gaming state, and even if they appear, it may be a so-called ghost effect as a disadvantageous gaming state.

FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C) show the effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image, and the projected image. As the liquid crystal image, a shield liquid crystal image 310 imitating a shield and a crack pattern 330 indicating cracks are displayed in the display area 13a. As the projected image, a spark projection image 560 showing a pattern in which sparks are scattered is projected. In FIGS. 42 (A) to 42 (C), the sword (decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68) and the shield (shield liquid crystal image 310) collide with each other, causing cracks in one of them, which is advantageous or disadvantageous in the gaming state. It shows a production that suggests.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the decorative portion 68A moves from the standby position to the appearance position as shown in FIG. 43 (B) from the state where the shield liquid crystal image 310 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, the decorative portion 68A may be reciprocated over and over again. In such a case, it is possible to preferably express how the sword and the shield collide with each other. Then, when the decorative portion 68A overlaps with a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310, the spark projection image 560 overlaps with the shield liquid crystal image 310 in a part of the display area 13a seen from the front of the player in the vicinity of the decorative portion 68A. Is projected. At this time, in the display area 13a, the area where the spark projection image 560 is projected (a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310) is a uniform gray color, for example, black or gray scale so that a clear image can be projected. It is desirable that it is partially formed as a display color region. The spark projection image 560 formed on the shield liquid crystal image 310 preferably expresses how the sword and the shield collide with each other. Even in the display area 13a in such a case, a projected image imitating a shield may be projected instead of the shield liquid crystal image 310.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43C, in the display area 13a, the movable accessory 68 is in a stationary state with the decorative portion 68A overlapping the shield liquid crystal image 310. At this time, the crack pattern 330 is displayed in a part of the display area 13a that cannot be seen from the front of the player because it overlaps with the decorative portion 68A. Although the crack pattern 330 is a liquid crystal image and cannot be seen by the player located in front of it, it can be visually recognized by wrapping around to the side of the decorative portion 68A and looking through the gap between the decorative portion 68A and the display area 13a. It is said that. After that, when a predetermined time elapses after the movable accessory 68 comes to rest, the decorative portion 68A returns to the standby position, although not particularly shown. As a result, the player can directly see the crack pattern 330 from the front without being obstructed by the decorative portion 68A. Such a crack pattern 330 can be visually recognized only by looking into the movable accessory 68 after it has stopped, and can be directly recognized after a predetermined time has passed since the movable accessory 68 has stopped, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Appears as a production that suggests that.

FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B) show an effect operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected image. As the projected image, a protective color projected image 570 that makes blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), or blank 671C invisible or difficult to see is projected as an identification symbol of the reel accessory 67. Further, as the projected image, a lost projected image 571 is projected. Note that FIG. 44B shows an effect that makes it difficult to distinguish between blue 7 (671A) and blank 671C until the final notification is made.

As shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the reel accessory 67 displays the variation of the identification symbol or the stop display, if the projected image is not projected on the opening 12b, the internal LED 677 has a predetermined brightness. It emits light or blinks with. Blue 7 (671A), blank 671C, and red 7 (671B) are formed at predetermined intervals on the sheet member 671 of the reel accessory 67, for example, against a plain white background. Blue 7 (671A) is a drawing area printed or painted in uniform blue. Red 7 (671B) is a drawing area printed or painted in a uniform red color. Blank 671C is a uniform white or gray background area with no printed or painted area. For example, when the reel body 670 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) rotates so as to move from top to bottom when viewed from the player side, the identification symbol is red 7 (671B) → blank 671C → blue 7 (671A). → Red 7 (671B) → ... is displayed in a variable order. When the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, as shown in the right column of FIG. 44 (A), for example, when suggesting a hit (big hit, small hit), blue 7 (671A) or red 7 is at the position of the opening 12b. (671B) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when suggesting a loss, the blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 44 (B), when the identification symbol fluctuates due to the rotation of the reel body 670, blue 7 (671A), blank 671C, and red 7 (671B) are sequentially displayed at the position of the opening 12b. You can see the colors that move at high speed and assimilate these colors according to the speed.

Then, when suggesting a hit, as shown in the left column of FIG. 44 (B), the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, and for example, blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector device main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue of the same or the same system color as blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread over at least the entire opening 12b. Since the protective color projection image 570 is composed of blue, which is the same color as or similar to blue 7 (671A), it is difficult to visually distinguish blue 7 (671A). That is, it seems that the blue 7 (671A) stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b is blended into the protective color projection image 570, and at this point, the player is asked whether the blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed. , It becomes impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector device main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, the blue 7 stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. (671A) becomes directly visible.

On the other hand, when suggesting a loss, as shown in the right column of FIG. 44 (B), when the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, the blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector device main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue, which is the same as or the same system color as blue 7 (671A), is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. .. Since the protective color projection image 570 is reflected by the blank 671C and looks uniform blue, it is difficult to visually determine whether the blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed. That is, even at this point, it is impossible or difficult for the player to visually determine whether the blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed or the blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector device main body B2 is stopped, and instead, the entire opening 12b is lost with the blank 671C as a base. The loss projection image 571 of the white 7 shown is projected. In the lost projection image 571, the white 7 portion is formed by the white image 571A, and the background around the white portion is formed by the blue background image 571B which is the same as the protective color projection image 570. That is, when suggesting a loss, the loss projection image 571 is projected at the position of the opening 12b so as to impress the loss more than the blank 671C.

With the protective color projection image 570 and the loss projection image 571 projected according to the color of such an identification symbol, the player can finally directly see either the blue 7 (671A) or the blank 671C. Until then, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be maintained, and the effect of the production is enhanced. If red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed in the case of suggesting a hit, a protective color projection image 570 consisting of red of the same or the same system color as red 7 (671B) is projected. .. Further, a protective color projection image 570 composed of a uniform predetermined color tone other than blue or red is projected, and it is possible to visually recognize that either blue 7 (671A) or red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed. However, blue 7 (671A) and red 7 (671B) may be blended into the protective color projection image 570 so that either of them cannot be distinguished. Of course, an identification pattern other than blue or red may be provided, and a protective color projection image 570 having a color tone corresponding to them may be projected.

FIG. 45 shows an effect operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected image. As the projected image, in addition to the protective color projected image 570, for example, a blue 7 projected image 572 having the same color and the same pattern as the blue 7 (671A) is projected. FIG. 45 shows an effect in which the reel accessory 67 repeatedly displays the variation of the identification symbol and the stop display over a predetermined number of times (in FIG. 45, four pseudo-reams as an example) like a so-called pseudo-ream.

As shown in FIG. 45, when the first pseudo-ream is started, the reel accessory 67 starts the variable display of the identification symbol, and then stops the predetermined identification symbol (blank 671C as an example in the figure). When it is displayed, the first pseudo-reel ends. At this time, a blue 7 projection image 572 that imitates the blue 7 is projected on the entire opening 12b using the blank 671C as a base. Such a blue 7 projected image 572 impresses the pseudo-ream itself. After that, similarly, the second pseudo-ream operation and the third pseudo-ream operation are repeatedly performed.

Finally, for example, assuming that an effect suggesting a hit or a loss is performed at the fourth pseudo-ream, the reel accessory 67 starts the variable display of the identification symbol at the start of the fourth pseudo-ream. After that, when suggesting a hit, the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, and for example, blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector device main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue of the same or the same system color as blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread over at least the entire opening 12b. As a result, the blue 7 (671A) stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b appears to be blended into the protective color projection image 570, and at this point, the player is stopped and displayed the blue 7 (671A). It becomes impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the blank 671C is stopped or displayed.

Further, although not particularly shown, when a loss is suggested, when the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, the blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector device main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue, which is the same as or the same system color as blue 7 (671A), is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. .. This makes it impossible or difficult for the player to visually determine whether the blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed or the blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating in the case of hitting, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector device main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, a stop display is displayed at the position of the opening 12b. The blue 7 (671A) is directly visible. On the other hand, in the case of loss, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector device main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, the blank 671C becomes directly visible. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, the loss projection image 571 may be projected at the position of the opening 12b.

According to the effect operation of the pseudo-ren, the expectation for the big hit is maintained until either the blue 7 (671A) or the blank 671C is finally directly visible in the final round of the pseudo-ren. And the effect of production is enhanced. If red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed in the case of suggesting a hit, a protective color projection image 570 consisting of red of the same or the same system color as red 7 (671B) is projected. .. Further, a protective color projection image 570 composed of a uniform predetermined color tone other than blue or red is projected, and it is possible to visually recognize that either blue 7 (671A) or red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed. However, blue 7 (671A) and red 7 (671B) may be blended into the protective color projection image 570 so that either of them cannot be distinguished. Of course, an identification pattern other than blue or red may be provided, and a protective color projection image 570 having a color tone corresponding to them may be projected. Further, the effect operation shown in FIG. 45 is not limited to the pseudo-ream, and can be applied to, for example, the effect operation of a mini game.

[Modifications and Other Embodiments]
Next, a modified example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and a gaming machine according to another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 65. The same or similar configurations as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Modification example of game board]
46 and 47 show a modified example of the game board 12. In the game board 12 shown in the figure, in addition to the reel accessory 67, a decorative logo member 69 that three-dimensionally indicates a logotype such as a model name is provided above the center of the display area 13a. Further, an opening 12b for displaying the identification symbol of the reel accessory 67 is provided on the upper right side of the display area 13a, and a decorative cover 12c having a three-dimensional design is provided around the opening 12b. Has been done. A projector unit (not shown) can project an image onto a decorative cover 12c including a decorative logo member 69 and an opening 12b.

[Example of projection effect operation]
48 (A) to 48 (F) show an example of an effect operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected image, and FIG. 49 shows an example of the effect operation of projecting the image to the decorative logo member 69. ..

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), when the identification symbol changes due to the rotation of the reel body 670 (not shown in the figure) of the reel accessory 67, blue 7 (671A) is displayed at the position of the opening 12b. Blank 671C and red 7 (671B) move at high speed in order, and a color assimilating these colors can be seen according to the speed.

The color formed by such high-speed movement of the identification symbol does not clearly indicate the original blue or red, and appears to be a color different from blue or red due to the rotational mixing. Then, as the rotation speed of the reel body 670 becomes faster, the sheet member 671 appears to have a uniform color tone at the opening 12b due to the rotation color mixing. As shown in FIG. 48 (B), a character projection image 580 showing a character or the like different from the identification symbol is projected on the sheet member 671 which looks uniform in color through the opening 12b. In order to make such a character projection image 580 clear, the color formed by the rotational mixing is preferably black or gray due to gray scale, but other colored colors may be used.

After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the character projection image 580 is projected on the opening 12b, while the background projection such that the background of the character projection image 580 is shown on the decorative cover 12c including the entire opening 12b. Image 581 is projected.

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), a symbol projection image 582 imitating the identification symbol is projected on the opening 12b instead of the character projection image 580.

When the symbol projection image 582 is projected onto the opening 12b in this way, as shown in FIGS. 48 (E) and 48 (F), the symbol projection image 582 is gradually enlarged and projected so as to expand to a position overlapping the decorative cover 12c. Will be done. The projected image may be configured to be projected only on the surrounding decorative members or the like while avoiding the flow area of the game ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from becoming difficult to see and the image from being reflected by the randomly rolling game ball to make the player feel uncomfortable.

According to such an effect operation, when the character projection image 580, the background projection image 581, and the symbol projection image 582 are projected onto the opening 12b during the variation display of the identification symbol by the reel accessory 67, the variation thereof. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the display is being displayed or stopped, and it is possible to visually perform various effects.

Further, since the background projection image 581 and the pattern projection image 582 can be projected so as to extend to the decorative cover 12c larger than the opening 12b, it is possible to perform even more diverse effects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49, during the variable display of the identification symbol by the reel accessory 67, the character projection image 580 and the background projection image 581 projected at the positions of the opening 12b and the decorative cover 12c are the decorative logo members. In some cases, the projection position is moved to the position of 69, and the projection is projected so as to be enlarged to the size found on the decorative logo member 69.

According to such a directing operation, the character projection image 580 can be made to feel as if it has moved from the position of the opening 12b or the decorative cover 12c to the position of the decorative logo member 69. It is possible to realize a pulling effect.

[Example of reach production operation]
FIG. 50 shows an example of a so-called reach effect operation using the display area 13a and the projected image. In the reach effect operation shown in the figure, the same symbol liquid crystal images 345 to 348 are variably displayed in a horizontal row so as to move sequentially from top to bottom in the display area 13a. The number at the end of the code of the symbol liquid crystal image 345 to 348 corresponds to the number indicated by the symbol liquid crystal image 345 to 348 as the identification symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), in the display area 13a, for example, the symbol liquid crystal images 345 and 346 corresponding to the numbers "5" and "6" are variably displayed so as to move in order from top to bottom. Suppose you are. At this time, the symbol projection image 594 corresponding to the number "4" is projected on the region around the lower part of the display region 13a so as to move in the order of the symbol liquid crystal image 345. Further, in the area around the upper part of the display area 13a, the symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number "7" is projected so as to move in the posterior order from the symbol liquid crystal image 346. The number at the end of the code of the symbol projection image 594,597 corresponds to the number indicated by the symbol projection image 594,597 as the identification symbol. In the following, the same applies to the codes of other symbol projection images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), in the display area 13a, the numbers of the identification symbols are shifted by one, and the symbol liquid crystal images 346 and 347 corresponding to the numbers "6" and "7" are displayed. It is displayed in a variable manner so that it moves from top to bottom. At this time, the symbol projection image 595 corresponding to the number "5" is projected on the region around the lower part of the display region 13a so as to move in the order of the symbol liquid crystal image 346. Further, in the area around the upper part of the display area 13a, the symbol projection image 598 corresponding to the number "8" is projected so as to move in the posterior order from the symbol liquid crystal image 347.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), in the display area 13a, the numbers of the identification symbols are shifted by one, and the symbol liquid crystal images 347 and 348 corresponding to the numbers "7" and "8" are on the top. It is displayed in a variable manner so that it moves from to bottom in order. At this time, the symbol projection image 596 corresponding to the number "6" is projected on the region around the lower part of the display region 13a so as to move in the order of the symbol liquid crystal image 347. On the other hand, in the area above the display area 13a, the symbol projection image corresponding to the number "9" should be projected according to the order of the identification symbols described above, but the number "7" is contrary to the order. The symbol projection image 597 corresponding to is projected. When such a pattern projection image 597 that is different from the normal order is projected, the expectation of the big hit is increased and the effect is irregular, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the symbol liquid crystal image 348 corresponding to the number "8" is variably displayed in the lower part of the display area 13a so as to move from top to bottom, while being displayed. In the upper part of the area 13a, the symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number "7" is displayed in a variable manner as if the previous symbol projection image 597 has moved downward. At this time, the symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number "7" is projected on the region around the lower part of the display region 13a so as to move in the order of the symbol liquid crystal image 348. On the other hand, the symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number "7" is projected on the area around the upper part of the display area 13a by continuing the irregular effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number "7" is variably displayed in the lower part of the display area 13a, and the previous symbol is displayed in the upper part of the display area 13a. The symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number "7" is displayed in a variable manner as if the projected image 597 has moved downward. At this time, the symbol projection image 598 corresponding to the number "8" is projected on the region around the lower part of the display region 13a so as to move in the order of the symbol liquid crystal image 347. On the other hand, the symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number "7" is projected on the area around the upper part of the display area 13a by continuing the irregular effect. That is, in this state, only the symbol projection image 598 shows a different number "8", and the two symbol liquid crystal images 347 and one symbol projection image 597 show the same number "7", whereby the player On the other hand, it can be felt as a production that further raises the expectation of the big hit.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number "7" is stopped and displayed at the lower part of the display area 13a, and the number "7" is also displayed at the upper part of the display area 13a. The symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to "7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number "7" is projected on the area around the lower part of the display area 13a, and the symbol corresponding to the number "7" is also projected on the area around the upper part of the display area 13a. The projected image 597 is projected. That is, in this state, the two symbol liquid crystal images 347 and the two symbol projected images 597 are all aligned and the same number "7" is shown. As a result, the player can enjoy, for example, the fact that the jackpot has been confirmed by the display mode of the identification symbol that combines the liquid crystal image and the projected image.

As shown as an example in FIG. 51, when the reach effect operation as shown in FIG. 50 is performed on the game board 12 shown in FIG. 47, it corresponds to the numbers “2” and “3” projected outside the display area 13a. The symbol projection image 592,593 is provided on a portion of the game area 12a that covers the rolling region of the game ball so that the irradiation light does not hit the game ball and impair visibility due to diffused reflection or the like. Is projected as a partially missing image so as not to form.

[Modification example of movable accessory]
52 and 53 show a modified example of the movable accessory.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory, light shielding for blocking the outward light of the LED 681 between the vicinity of the end portion of the base member 680 and the vicinity of the end portion of the cover member 684 is shielded. A wall 689 is provided. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52, the peripheral edge portion of the cover member 684 is visually recognized as the non-light emitting region 684b when viewed from the player side, and even if the LED 681 emits light or blinks, the peripheral portion of the peripheral portion 684b A clear projected image can be projected by projecting the projected image only on the cover.

FIG. 54 shows another modification of the movable accessory.

The cover member 684 shown in FIG. 54 is not provided with the non-transmissive member 685 in the central portion thereof, and the central portion is partially formed as a non-transmissive region 684 b'by a non-transmissive material. Also from this, when viewed from the player side, the central portion of the cover member 684 is visually recognized as the non-light emitting region 684b', and even if the LED 681 emits light or blinks, the projected image is projected only on the non-light emitting region 684b' in the central portion. A clear projected image can be projected by projecting.

FIG. 55 shows another modification of the movable accessory. The projector device main body B2 does not have to be fixed, and may be configured so that the irradiation position and the irradiation angle can be changed by a predetermined drive mechanism according to a game situation or the like.

The decorative portion 68A'of the movable accessory shown in FIG. 55 includes a cover member 684' formed in a substantially circular shape, an arm member 680' that connects a drive portion (not shown) and the cover member 684', and also serves as a base member. Have. Such a decorative portion 68A'also moves from the standby position to the appearance position as an effect suggesting the advantages / disadvantages of the gaming state, and is in a state of overlapping a part of the display area 13a.

At this time, in the central region occupying the lower part of the cover member 684'in the display region 13a, for example, a gray background liquid crystal image 350 by gray scale is formed, and the character body portion is formed so as to overlap the background liquid crystal image 350. The displayed character body projection image 600 is projected. Then, a character face projection image 610 showing the face portion of the character is projected on the cover member 684'. Further, although not particularly shown, a liquid crystal image related to the character is displayed in the other area of the display area 13a. According to this, the entire character can be expressed by combining the character body projection image 600 projected on a part of the display area 13a and the character face projection image 610 projected on the cover member 684'. Furthermore, various effects can be performed by combining with a liquid crystal image. In the area where the background liquid crystal image 350 and the character body projection image 600 are displayed, a liquid crystal image showing the body portion of the character may be displayed instead of these.

[Other Embodiments]
FIGS. 56 to 57 show the gaming machines according to the second to third embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the projector unit B is not provided with a mirror member, and the irradiation light of the image is directly emitted from the projector device main body B2 toward the front surface of the game board 12. It is configured in. Even with the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment as described above, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment described above or a modification thereof.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the direct irradiation type projector unit B is adopted as in the second embodiment, and further, the so-called front liquid crystal device 13'is replaced with the liquid crystal display device. Is adopted. Further, the movable accessory 68 is located on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 and is located between the game board 12 and the front liquid crystal device 13'in a state of being attached to the upper front surface of the game board 12.

The front liquid crystal device 13' includes a pair of edge lights 13A, a light guide plate 13B, and a front liquid crystal panel 13C, and is arranged between the protective glass 28 and the game board 12. The front liquid crystal device 13'irradiates the back surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C with light from the edge light 13A via the light guide plate 13B, and controls the liquid crystal drive of the front liquid crystal panel 13C to display a liquid crystal image on the entire front surface. .. Further, the front liquid crystal device 13'by appropriately controlling the liquid crystal drive of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, the front liquid crystal panel 13C passes through the light guide plate 13B to the back surface, or the light guide plate 13B to the front liquid crystal display at a predetermined transmittance. Light is transmitted to the front through the panel 13C. That is, the irradiation light and the external light from the projector device main body B2 reach the game area 12a and the decorative portion 68A through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B, and the light reflected there reaches the light guide plate 13B and the front liquid crystal panel 13C. Perceived by the player through.

The decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 is positioned so as to be hidden by the upper decorative unit 40 in the standby state (non-operating state), and in the appearing state (state shown in FIG. 57), the front liquid crystal panel 13C of the front liquid crystal device 13' And the light guide plate 13B can be seen through. In addition, the player can visually recognize the projected image projected on the decorative portion 68A through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B. Even with the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the modifications thereof can be obtained.

The projector unit B may irradiate the game area 12a and the decorative portion 68A directly through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B without passing through the protective glass 28. Further, also in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the reflection type projector unit B provided with the mirror member B3 may be adopted as in the first embodiment.

[Example of production operation according to other embodiments]
58 and 59 show an example of a projection effect operation using the front liquid crystal device 13'and the projected image according to the third embodiment of FIG. 57.

The movable accessory 68 is located on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 (see FIG. 58 (A)), which is not shown as a whole so as to be hidden from the player side in the standby state (non-operating state), and is in the appearance state. , The decorative portion 68A moves to a position on the front side of the front liquid crystal panel 13C so as to overlap a part of the display area 13a (see FIG. 58 (B)). As a result, the movable accessory 68 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed on the front liquid crystal panel 13C. In the standby state shown in FIG. 58 (A), the movable accessory 68 cannot actually be visually recognized by the upper decorative unit 40. That is, such a movable accessory 68 also performs the same effect operation as that according to the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative portion 68A is placed on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 in the standby position. It is kept in a horizontal position in a hidden state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a part of the decorative portion 68A is located in front of the front liquid crystal panel 13C at the appearance position, and appears so as to form an inclined posture in a state of overlapping with the game area 12a. To do. The effect can be improved by the appearance operation of the movable accessory 68 as well.

FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) show the effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, and the projected image. As the projected image, a character projected image 620 showing a predetermined character is projected. As the liquid crystal image, although not particularly shown, a black or gray scale gray background color image is displayed in which a part of the front liquid crystal panel 13C overlapping the character projection image 620 is suitable for the background color. Note that FIG. 59 (A) shows an inappropriate example when projecting a projected image.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the character projection image 620 is projected in accordance with the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68, the light emission effect 681A by the LED 681 (not shown) is performed. Then, a part of the character projection image 620 to be formed in the decorative portion 68A disappears or becomes easily visible as if it is blurred due to the additive color mixing of light described above. As a result, it looks as if the decorative portion 68A only overlaps the front side of the character projection image 620, and a projection mapping image such as the character projection image 620 is projected on the physically moving movable accessory 68. However, it is not possible to realize a powerful production.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), when projecting the character projection image 620, it is preferable not to perform the light emission effect by the LED 681 (not shown). Then, as shown in the figure, the character projection image 620 can be formed so as to protrude to the front side from the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C to the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 without partially lacking. As a result, the decoration unit 68A can be visually recognized so as to penetrate the character projection image 620, so that the projection mapping image such as the character projection image 620 can be appropriately projected according to the physically moving movable accessory 68. It is possible to realize a powerful virtual realistic production.

60 and 61 show an example of a projection effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the front liquid crystal device 13', and the projected image according to the third embodiment of FIG. 57. The projected images include a box projection image 630 showing the closed state of the treasure box, a box projection image 630'showing the open state, a sword projection image 640 that imitates the same sword as the decorative part 68A, and a star pattern projection showing glitter. Image 650 is projected. The liquid crystal image includes a background liquid crystal image 360 for forming a black or gray background suitable for forming a projected image inside the box projected image 630', and light is transmitted inside the box projected image 630'. A transmissive liquid crystal image 370 for forming the portion and a star pattern liquid crystal image 380 showing glitter are displayed. The box projection image 630, 630'and the sword projection image 640 may be displayed as a liquid crystal image.

First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the decorative portion 68A is on the back side of the front liquid crystal panel 13C in the standby state (non-operating state), and is not shown as a whole so as to be hidden from the player side. It is located on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40. At this time, on the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, the box projection image 630 is projected on a part of the area near the decorative portion 68A. A part of the front liquid crystal panel 13C on which the box projection image 630 is projected is controlled so as to form a black or gray background.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the box projection image 630'is projected in place of the box projection image 630 on a part of the front liquid crystal panel 13C corresponding to the box projection image 630. At this time, since the background liquid crystal image 360 is displayed inside the box projection image 630', even if the decorative portion 68A moves to the back side of the background liquid crystal image 360, it is blocked by the background liquid crystal image 360 and decorated. Part 68A cannot be seen. Such a box-projected image 630'appears as an effect suggesting a loss, for example, when nothing is shown as a background liquid crystal image 360 inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the background liquid crystal image 360 may be displayed and the sword projection image 640 may be projected inside the box projection image 630'. In this case, for example, although the degree of expectation (reliability) of the hit is not so high, the effect can have a certain degree of expectation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), since the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 is displayed inside the box projection image 630', the decorative portion 68A that has moved to the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 can be visually recognized. In some cases. In such a case, the actual decoration part 68A looks like it is in the treasure box, and the expectation of the big hit is further increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a star pattern projection image 650 is projected on the decorative portion 68A through the transmission liquid crystal image 370 inside the box projection image 630', or a star is projected on a part of the transmission liquid crystal image 370. The pattern liquid crystal image 380 may be displayed. In this case, the effect is such that the expectation (reliability) of the hit is further increased. The star pattern liquid crystal image 380 displayed in the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 may be projected as a projected image. According to such an effect, the liquid crystal image of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, the projected image, and the movable accessory 68 can be used to appropriately display the image or image in three dimensions and in a plane, which is a novel and eye-catching interest. It is possible to realize a high-quality production.

[First modification of production suppression processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a first modification of the effect suppression process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect suppression process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 62, in S400, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lightning projection image is selected based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360) of FIG. 38. When the lightning projection image is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S401. When the lightning projection image is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S401, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the movable accessory 68 performs the effect operation based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360). When the movable accessory 68 performs the effect operation, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S402. When the movable accessory 68 does not perform the effect operation, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S402, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the movable accessory 68 performs the light emission effect. When the movable accessory 68 performs the light emitting effect, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S403. When the movable accessory 68 does not perform the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S403, the sub CPU 81 sets the data for stopping the projection of the lightning projection image in the predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, when the movable accessory 68 performs the light emitting effect, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector device main body B2 so as to give priority to the light emitting effect and not perform the projection effect by the lightning projection image. On the other hand, when the light emission effect is not performed, if the projection effect of the lightning projection image is selected, the projector device main body B2 is controlled so that the projection effect is performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine. According to such a process, the projection effect by the projected image can be executed only when the light emission effect is not performed, and a clear image can be projected on the decorative body 68A of the movable accessory 68.

Even if the light emitting effect is performed, the projection effect by the lightning projection image or the like may be executed as long as the time and timing are such that the movable accessory 68 does not emit light.

[Second modification of production suppression processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a second modification of the effect suppression process executed by the sub CPU 81. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a light emission luminance correction table used in this effect suppression process. The emission luminance correction table is stored in, for example, the program ROM 82 of the sub-control circuit 200. The effect suppression process of FIG. 63 is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 63, in S400, the sub CPU 81 selects a projection effect of projecting a projected image toward the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360) of FIG. 38. Determine if it has been done. When this projection effect is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S411. If such a projection effect is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S411, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C perform the light emission effect based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360). When performing the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S412. When the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C do not perform the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

In S412, the sub CPU 81 sets the correction luminance data corresponding to each of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C defined in the emission luminance correction table of FIG. 64 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. In the emission luminance correction table, the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C are represented by "A", "B", and "C", respectively. The modified luminance data of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C (“A”, “B”, “C”) is “A”, depending on the projection angles α, β, and γ of the projector device main body B2 with respect to the optical axis X. It is stipulated that "B" and "C" are greatly modified (reduced) in this order. Based on such modified brightness data, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector device main body B2 so as to execute the projection effect by the projected image while performing the light emission effect with the corrected brightness for each of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C. .. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine. According to such processing, even when the light emitting effect of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C is performed, the brightness of the decorative members is appropriately corrected (reduced) according to the projection angles α, β, and γ. Since the projected image is projected above, a clear image can be projected on average in any of the decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C.

<Fourth Embodiment>
FIGS. 65 to 65 are views for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment has a main body frame having a configuration different from that of the base door 3 (see FIG. 3) of the first embodiment, and includes two projector units arranged in the vertical direction. As long as there is no contradiction, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment has the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the gaming machine 1 of the first to third embodiments, and the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 65 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The pachinko gaming machine 1A includes a main body (outer frame) 2, a main body frame 400 rotatably supported by the main body 2, a game board 12A attached to the front side of the main body frame 400, and a front surface of the game board 12A. A glass door 5 attached to the main body frame 400 on the side is provided.

[Main body and glass door]
The main body 2 as an outer frame has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, and the main body frame 400 can be rotated around a main body frame hinge 2b as a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the vicinity of one side edge. Axle support. The glass door 5 has the same configuration as the glass door 4 of the first embodiment, and a dish unit 900, which will be described later, is provided at the lower portion.

[Body frame]
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 400. The main body frame 400 is between a mounting frame 410 arranged on the front side, a cover member 430 mounted on the back side of the mounting frame 410 and capable of accommodating game machine components, and between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430. The mounting base 420 provided in the above is provided.

[Mounting frame]
FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame 410. The mounting frame 410 has a pair of vertical frames 411 and a pair of horizontal frames 412, and forms a substantially rectangular appearance. The mounting frame 410 has a storage tank 415, and a screen portion b4 on which irradiation light from the projector unit b, which will be described later, is projected, a game board 12A, a launching device 15, and the like are mounted. Further, on the back side of the mounting frame 410, a ball detection unit 800 (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the out port 55 (see FIG. 66) of the game board 12A. Further, the pair of vertical frames 411 have a fixing portion 411a (see FIG. 67) to which the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 can be separately fixed on the back surface side, respectively.

A game board movable stopper 413 for detachably fixing the game board 12A is attached to the inner surface of the pair of vertical frames 411. The game board movable stopper 413 is fixed at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction along the vertical frame 411. The game board movable stopper 413 detachably sandwiches the side edge of the game board 12A. With such a game board movable stopper 413, for example, the lower side of the game board 12A is locked to a locking portion such as a groove arranged in the lower part of the mounting frame 410, and the vicinity of both ends of the upper side is movable. By sandwiching it with the stopper 413, the game board 12A can be fixed to the mounting frame 410.

Further, a screen stopper 414 for detachably fixing the screen portion b4 is attached to the inner side surface of the pair of vertical frames 411. The screen stopper 414 is fixed at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction along the vertical frame 411. A cover member 430 is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame 410 so as to cover the game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414. The game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414 may be configured to be movable on the vertical frame 411 so that they can be fixed at an arbitrary position. By attaching a jig for fixing the game member such as the game board 12A and the effect device such as the screen portion b4 to the vertical frame 411 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, the size and type of the game member and the effect device can be adjusted. Since it is possible to change the jig type and position, various layouts of the game machine are possible.

[Game board]
FIG. 69 is a top view of the game board 12A. The game board 12A has the same structure as the game board 12 (see FIG. 4) of the first embodiment, and further has the following structure. The game board 12A includes a game area 12a, and a wiring portion such as the first special winning opening solenoid 53b provided on the back surface side (rear side) of the game board 12A is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid 53b or the like. It has a game board relay board 101. Further, the game board 12A is formed of a transparent material, a screen sheet is attached to the back side thereof, and the game board 12A also functions as a screen on which the projected light emitted from the projector unit b, which will be described later, is projected.

The game board relay board 101 is attached to the vertical base 101A extending to the back side at a substantially right angle to the surface on which the game area 12a of the game board 12A is formed on the back surface side (rear side). On the other hand, it should be erected at a right angle. The game board relay board 101 is provided with a connector connecting portion 101a to which a connector for electrically connecting to another board is connected.

Further, the game board relay board 101 is extended to a position where the connection operation to the connector connecting portion 101a can be performed from the outside of the cover member 430 via the opening 432e of the cover member 430 described later, and at least the game. The connector connection portion 101a is arranged so that the wiring insertion port 101b faces the opening 432e of the cover member 430, which will be described later, in a state where the outer portion of the board relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430. There is. The connector connection portion 101a functions as an example of the game board connector connection portion, and is wired to the relay board connector connection portion 100a (see FIG. 75), which is an example of the specific component connector connection portion of the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) described later. It is connected by a member (cable).

FIG. 70 is a top view of a modified example of the game board 12A. FIG. 70 shows an enlarged portion of the game board 12A provided with the vertical base 101A. The game board relay board 101 of the modified example can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board 12A from a state of being erected substantially at right angles to the game board 12A. Specifically, the vertical base 101A of the modified example is rotated by a base member 101Aa erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A and a hinge 101B which is a rotation axis extending in parallel with the game area 12a of the game board 12A. A rotating member 101Ab freely connected to the base member 101Aa and to which the game board relay board 101 is attached is provided. Further, in the vertical base 101A of the modified example, a protrusion 101a is formed on either one of the base member 101Aa and the rotating member 101Ab at the joint surface between the base member 101Aa and the rotating member 101Ab, and the protrusion 101a is formed on the other. A boss hole 101b is formed in which the boss hole 101b can be inserted. The rotating member 101Ab was erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A, and the protrusion 101a was inserted into the boss hole 101b, so that the game board relay board 101 was erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A. It is fixed in the state. Further, from this state, the rotating member 101Ab is rotated around the hinge 101B so that the protrusion 101a is pulled out from the boss hole 101b and the game board relay board 101 is in a state parallel to the game board 12A. Folds in.

[Mounting base]
71 is a perspective view of the mounting base 420, FIG. 72 is a front view of the mounting base 420, and FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the main body frame 400. A projector unit b and a mirror member b3 as a game device capable of executing control related to the game are mounted on the mounting base 420. The mounting base 420 is formed under the game device mounting portion 421 to which the projector unit b is mounted, the projection light hole 422 formed under the game device mounting portion 421 and through which the projected light emitted from the projector unit b can pass, and the projection. It has a mirror member base 423 arranged below the optical hole 422 and to which the mirror member b3 is attached, and a substrate hole 424 through which the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 70) of the game board 12A is inserted. The mounting base 420 has two configurations including a game device mounting portion 421, a projection light hole 422, and a mirror member base 423, and these configurations are arranged in the vertical direction. In such an upper configuration, the projected light emitted from the projector unit b is projected onto the back surface of the screen unit b4. Further, in the configuration below, the projected light emitted from the projector unit b is projected onto the back surface of the game board 12A. The board holes 424 are arranged on the back side of the game board relay board 101 in a state where the mounting base 420 is attached to the mounting frame 410 to which the game board 12A is mounted, and the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 70) is arranged. It is a hole to be inserted.

The game device mounting portion 421 is a plate-like body that is inclined downward from the back surface side to the front surface side, and the projector unit b is mounted on the back surface side so as to irradiate the projected light obliquely downward on the front surface side. The projection light hole 422 is a hole formed in a range that does not block the projected light emitted from the projector unit b. The mirror member base 423 is a plate-like body that is inclined downward from the back surface side to the front surface side. Further, the mirror member base 423 is formed in a range necessary for reflecting the projected light emitted from the projector unit b. Specifically, since the mirror member base 423 is inclined downward from the back surface side to the front surface side, the distance from the projector unit b mounted above increases from the back surface side to the front surface side. Therefore, the width of the range required to reflect the projected light emitted from the projector unit b is narrower on the back side than on the front side. That is, the range required to reflect the projected light emitted from the projector unit b in the mirror member base 423 is a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the side on the back side is narrower than the width of the side on the front side in top view. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, the mirror member base 423 is formed in a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the side on the back side is narrower than the width of the side on the front side in the top view.

Further, the mirror member b3 attached to the upper surface of the mirror member base 423 is also formed in a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the side on the back side is narrower than the width of the side on the front side in the top view. Further, since the mirror member base 423 is inclined downward from the back side to the front side, as shown in FIG. 72, the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 have an upper side width in front view. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape narrower than the width of the lower side. Further, the mirror member b3 is attached to the mirror member base 423 by adjusting members 423a provided in the vicinity of the four corners of the trapezoidal shape. The adjusting member 423a is composed of, for example, a fastening member for fastening the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and an elastic member arranged between the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and loosens the fastening member. The mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are separated from each other, and the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are brought close to each other by tightening the fastening member. By adjusting the mounting angle of the mirror mirror member b3 with respect to the mirror member base 423 by such an adjusting member 423a, the position and angle of the projected light emitted from the projector unit b is projected onto the screen portion b4 or the game board 12A. Can be adjusted.

By attaching the projector unit b to such a game device mounting portion 421, one end side of the projector cover b1 provided with the projection lens b2a for emitting the projected light from the projector device main body b2, which will be described later, is a pachinko game machine. On the front side of 1A (see FIG. 66), the opposite end on one end side can be arranged on the back side, and one end side can be provided so as to be lower than the opposite end side. Become. Then, the projector unit b is covered with the cover member 430. As a result, a predetermined space 405 is formed between the cover member 430, the lower portion of the projector cover b1 and the cover member 430 at a position that does not block the projected light emitted from the projection lens b2a, and the predetermined space 405 is formed. A recess 431a of the cover member 430, which will be described later, is arranged therein, and the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the recess 431a.

The mounting base 420 may be formed in a shape to which not only the projector unit b but also other gaming devices such as the liquid crystal display device 13 (see FIG. 3) can be mounted. That is, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed according to the type of the gaming device within a range that can be accommodated in the space formed between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430.

[Projector unit]
As shown in FIG. 73, the projector unit b includes a projector device main body b2 as a projected image generator capable of generating projected light, a projector cover b1 as a storage case capable of accommodating the projector device main body b2, and a projector device main body. It includes a projection lens b2a as an irradiation unit that emits projected light from b2. The projector device main body b2 has the same configuration as the projector device main body B2 (see FIG. 14), is connected to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 14), and is connected to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 14) by the sub control circuit 200 to form the projector control circuit 90 (see FIG. 14). Is controlled, the projected light by the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 15) is magnified and emitted by the projection lens b2a, and the irradiated light is reflected by the mirror member b3 and directed toward the back surface of the game board 12A and the screen portion b4. By projecting the irradiation light, the image is displayed as a visual effect. Such a screen unit b4 functions as an example of a reflecting unit capable of reflecting the projected light emitted from the projector unit b. Further, the screen unit b4 functions as an example of a screen unit that projects a predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the mirror member b3. Further, at a position corresponding to the above-mentioned space 405, a part of the cover member 430 is formed in a concave shape, and the main substrate 70A can be accommodated in the concave portion.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an optical axis of the projected light emitted from the projector unit b. As shown in FIG. 74, these irradiation lights are emitted downward while the projected light L1 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided at the upper part forms a projection range as shown by the dotted line. , The upper mirror member b3 reflects obliquely upward on the front side and is projected onto the back side of the screen portion b4. The projection lens b2a of the present embodiment is composed of a lens member, and the upper half side (front side) of the lens member is in a light-shielded state, and is emitted from the lower half side (rear side) of the lens member. The projected image is generated by the projected light. Therefore, the projected light emitted from the projection lens b2a is formed so as to spread from the lower half side of the lens member. Similarly, the projected light L2 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided at the lower part is emitted downward while forming the projection range as shown by the dotted line, and is emitted downward by the mirror member b3 at the lower part on the front side. It reflects diagonally upward and is projected onto the back side of the game board 12A.
In this way, by arranging the projector unit b or the Mira member b3 at a constant installation angle and accommodating the projector unit b, the base case, etc. in the space generated behind them, a plurality of gaming devices can be arranged. Other game machine components can be arranged efficiently, and space can be saved.

[Cover member]
FIG. 75 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the cover member 430, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the cover member 430. As shown in FIG. 75, the cover member 430 is formed from the back surface portion 431 and two side surfaces 432 facing each other, and is formed in a space formed between the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420 (see FIG. 73). It can accommodate at least some of the parts. Further, the cover member 430 is provided on the back side of the game board by being provided on the backmost side, and functions as an example of the cover member for covering the electric components.

As shown in FIG. 75, the width of the back surface portion 431 is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base 420. The back surface portion 431 includes a recess 431a capable of accommodating the main control board 70A, a lid portion 431b covering the recess 431a, and an opening 431c formed at a position corresponding to a waste heat port of the projector unit b (see FIG. 73). A payout control board accommodating portion 431d capable of accommodating the payout control board 123A. Further, as shown in FIG. 76, the back surface portion 431 is formed with an opening 432f for the second guide gutter in which the receiving portion 434a (see FIG. 80) of the second guide gutter 434, which will be described later, is arranged. As shown in FIG. 73, the recess 431a and the payout control board accommodating portion 431d are formed so as to project from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and cover the main control board 70A and the payout control board 123A. It can be accommodated so as not to protrude from the surface of the 430 to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The recess 431a is arranged in a predetermined space 405 formed under the projector cover b1 with the cover member 430 mounted on the back side of the mounting base 420 (see FIG. 73), and accommodates the main control board 70A. , Covered with lid 431b. The main control board 70A includes, for example, a main control board connector connection portion 70Aa which is an example of a general component connector connection portion connected to the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) by a wiring member (cable). The main control board connector connection portion 70Aa is provided near the side edge of the main control board 70A, and even when the lid portion 431b is attached to the recess 431a, it is not covered by the lid portion 431b and is exposed, and the wiring member (cable). ) Can be attached and detached. As a result, the surface of the back surface portion 431 becomes substantially flush with each other. As described above, the cover member 430 can accommodate the main control board 70A, which is an example of the first game machine component, inside the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and at least two side surface portions 432. Further, the openings 431c are formed at positions corresponding to the waste heat ports of the two projector units b, respectively. The payout control board accommodating portion 431d is arranged in a space formed in the lower part of the lower mirror member base 423 in a state of being mounted on the back side of the mounting base 420. Further, the recess 431a is arranged closer to the center of the cover member 430 than the arrangement position of the ball passage unit 730 (see FIG. 82) described later.

As shown in FIG. 75, the widths of the side surfaces 432 facing each other become narrower from the front side to the back side. The side surface 432 is provided with a mounting portion 433 that can be mounted on the mounting base 420 on the end side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion 431, and at least one side surface 432 is adjacent to the back surface portion 431 from the end portion provided with the mounting portion 433. It is formed so as to incline toward the end. The inclined side surface 432 includes a side surface first recess 432a which is a specific accommodating portion, a side surface first lid portion 432b which covers the side surface first recess 432a, a side surface second recess 432c which is a general accommodating portion, and a side surface second recess. It has a side surface second lid portion 432d that covers the 432c, and an opening portion 432e formed in the side surface first recess 432a. Further, the recess 431a and the side surface second recess 432c are an example of a general housing portion composed of at least two or more housing portions, and are adjacent to the side surface first recess 432a which is an example of the specific housing portion.

The side surface first recess 432a is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430 and is formed at a position adjacent to the recess 431a of the back surface portion 431 and the payout control board accommodating portion 431d, and is formed as a specific game machine component or a second game mechanism. The relay board 100 as a component can be accommodated. The side surface second recess 432c is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430, is formed at a position adjacent to the side surface first recess 432a, and can accommodate the sub-control board 80A as a plurality of other types of game machine components. .. The side surface first recess 432a and the side surface second recess 432c are formed so as to project from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the inside of the pachinko game machine 1A, and the relay board 100 and the sub-control board 80A are pachinko game from the surface of the cover member 430. It can be accommodated so as not to protrude to the back side of the machine 1A. The relay board 100 is, for example, a relay board connector which is an example of a specific component connector connection portion connected to a main control board 70A, a sub control board 80A, a game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69), and the like by a wiring member (cable). A connection portion 100a is provided. The sub-control board 80A includes, for example, a sub-control board connector connecting portion 80Aa which is an example of a general component connector connecting portion connected to a relay board 100 or the like by a wiring member (cable). That is, the relay board connector connecting portion 100a and the main control board connector connecting portion 70Aa and the sub control board connector connecting portion 80Aa are connected by a wiring member (cable). The opening 432e is provided with wiring from the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69) of the game board 12A housed inside the space formed from the back surface portion 431 and the two side surface portions 432 on the outside of the cover member 430. It is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100, and is formed at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101 erected from the back side of the game board 12A in a state where the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410. ing. The side surface first recess 432a in which such an opening 432e is formed is provided on the outer surface of the side surface portion, and is a specific accommodating portion capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component connected to wiring through the opening. It works as an example. Further, the side surface second recess 432c is formed on the inclined side surface portion on the outside of the cover member so as to project from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the game machine, and is different from the first game machine component. This is an example of a storage unit capable of accommodating game machine components. As a result, the main housing of the game board relay board 101 and, for example, the recess 431a adjacent to the side surface first recess 432a via the connector connected to the connector connection portion 101a of the game board relay board 101 from the opening 432e. The control board 70A can be electrically connected to the control board 70A. As described above, the side surface first recess 432a that can accommodate the relay board 100 is arranged at the center of the recess that can accommodate other substrates.

FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the game board relay board 101 and the board hole 424 of the mounting base 420 and the opening 432e of the cover member 430. FIG. 77 is an enlarged perspective view of a portion where the game board relay board 101 is attached, (a) shows a state in which the attachment base 420 is attached to the back side of the attachment frame 410, and (b) is further attached. It shows a state in which the cover member 430 is attached to the back side of the base 420. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the mounting base 420 is mounted on the mounting frame 410 to which the game board 12A (see FIG. 67) is mounted, the connector connecting portion 101a of the game board relay board 101 is the mounting base. It protrudes from the 420 substrate hole 424 to the back side. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), by further attaching the cover member 430 to the back side of the mounting base 420 from the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), the side surface of the game board relay board 101 is attached to the cover member 430. Be covered. In this state, the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connecting portion 101a faces in the direction of the opening 432e of the cover member 430. In FIG. 77, the entire game board relay board 101 is covered by the cover member 430 and the side surface second lid portion 432d, but only a part of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. Further, only one surface such as the outer surface or the inner surface of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. In any case, the effect of the present invention can be achieved if at least a part of the external force applied to the game board relay board 101 can be prevented. In that case, it is desirable to provide the connector connection portion 101a in a portion not covered by the cover member 430 (for example, if the outer surface of the game board relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430, the game board relay board 101 A connector connecting portion 101a is provided on the inner side surface of the above).

Further, as shown in FIG. 77A, the mounting base 420 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back surface of the mounting frame 410 by a fixing member 425 composed of screws or the like. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the cover member 430 is arranged on the back side of the mounting base 420, the fixing member 425 is covered with the mounting portion 433, and the fixing is composed of screws or the like penetrating the mounting base 420. The member 435 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back surface of the mounting frame 410. Therefore, the screw stopper of the mounting base 420 cannot be removed until after the screw stopper of the cover member 430 is removed.

FIG. 78 is a top view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. FIG. 78 shows a state in which the main body frame 400 is opened from the main body 2 (a state in which the main body frame 400 is arranged inside the main body 2 and rotated 90 degrees around the main body frame hinge 2b). The cover member 430 has a side surface 432 opposite to the side pivotally supported by the main body frame hinge 2b formed inside a virtual circle VC that passes through the inner side edge of the main body 2 with the main body frame hinge 2b as a rotation axis as the center. At least part of it is formed in a shape along a virtual circle.

[Gutter connection part]
79 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 400, and FIGS. 80 and 81 are exploded perspective views of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434. 80 and 81 are views showing only the first gutter 416 and the second gutter 434 shown in FIG. 79. FIG. 80 is a view seen from the mounting frame 410, and FIG. 81 is a view seen from the cover member 430. As shown in FIG. 79, the mounting frame 410 includes a storage tank 415 capable of storing game balls supplied from a storage unit (not shown), and a first gutter 416 that guides the game balls downstream from the storage tank 415. Have. The cover member 430 has a payout device 700 capable of paying out the game ball, and a second guide gutter 434 that guides the game ball to the payout device 700.

When the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes a state. One of the first gutter 416 and the second gutter 434 (the second gutter 434 in the example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) and the other (the first gutter 416 in the example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81). ) Is provided with a receiving portion 434a formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the opening. The receiving portion 434a has a rib 434b as a connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion 434a to the connecting position. The rib 434b is a plate-like body that extends in the radial direction centered on the opening and whose side edges are inclined downward from the outer edge to the inner edge of the receiving portion 434a, and a plurality of ribs 434b are arranged so as to surround the opening. .. One of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 (the first guide gutter 416 in the example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) has a shape of a portion provided on the outer edge of the opening and surrounded by ribs 434b. It is formed with an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the above, and has an engaging portion 416a as an engaging means for engaging with the rib 434b at the connection position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the mounting frame 410 has a third guide gutter 418 that guides the game ball to the outlet 901 (see FIG. 65) of the dish unit 900. Further, the cover member 430 has a fourth guide gutter (see FIG. 83) as a fourth guide gutter that guides the game ball downstream from the payout device 700 described later.

The third taxiway 418, the first taxiway 730C, and the second taxiway 730D (see FIG. 84) are such that when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the other opening is inserted into one opening. By being connected to, the game ball can flow down. A receiving portion 418a is provided in either one of the third taxiway 418 and the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D (the third taxiway 418 in the example shown in FIG. 67). The receiving portion 418a has a plurality of ribs like the receiving portion 434a. The discharge port 730B (see FIG. 83) of the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D has an engaging portion that engages with a plurality of ribs of the receiving portion 418a, similarly to the first taxiway 416.

[Payout device]
FIG. 82 is an overall perspective view showing the payout device 700, and FIG. 83 is a perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730 included in the payout device 700. The payout device 700 includes a ball supply path 710, a ball delivery mechanism 720, and a ball passage unit 730. The ball supply path 710 is a piping component that guides the game ball from the storage tank 415 (see FIG. 79) provided at the upper part to the ball delivery mechanism 720. The ball sending mechanism 720 pays out game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls while counting the number of prize balls according to the winning. The ball passage unit 730 is arranged at the rear end of the cover member 430 (see FIG. 79), and guides the game ball delivered from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to the outlet 901 of the dish unit 900, which will be described later. is there.

The ball supply path 710 transfers a game ball from the storage tank 415 (see FIG. 79) to the ball delivery mechanism 720 via the first plumb gutter 416 and the second plumb gutter 434 (see FIG. 81) connected to each other. It is installed vertically so that it can flow down naturally one by one. The lower end exit (not shown) of the ball supply path 710 is connected to the upper inlet (not shown) of the ball delivery mechanism 720.

The ball delivery mechanism 720 is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the ball supply path 710 can be guided to the inside from the upper entrance (not shown) and can be fed out one by one from the lower outlet (not shown). The ball delivery mechanism 720 has an internal mechanism capable of feeding out game balls one by one, a solenoid for operating the internal mechanism, and a count sensor (not shown) for counting the delivered game balls. The ball delivery mechanism 720 makes the internal mechanism and the solenoid inactive so as not to pay out the game ball when there is no prize, and when there is a prize, the ball delivery mechanism 720 is inside until the game ball of the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is paid out. When the game balls are counted by the count sensor while the mechanism and the solenoid are in the operating state and the game balls for the number of prize balls are delivered, the internal mechanism and the solenoid are put into the non-operating state again. As a result, the ball delivery mechanism 720 can pay out the game balls for the number of prize balls one by one at the time of winning. The lower exit of the ball delivery mechanism 720 is connected to the introduction port 730A provided in the upper part of the ball passage unit 730, and the game balls delivered from the ball delivery mechanism 720 are connected to the introduction port 730A of the ball passage unit 730 one by one. Flow down. The game ball delivered from the ball delivery mechanism 720 is basically guided to the introduction port 730A, but may be guided to the ball ejection port 730a described later adjacent to the introduction port 730A.

The ball passage unit 730 has a guide path capable of passing a large number of game balls delivered from the ball delivery mechanism 720 in a beaded manner, and through this guide path, the ball passage unit 730 reaches the outlet 901 of the dish unit 900, which will be described later. It is configured to guide the game balls. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730 in a direction different from that of FIG. 84. The ball passage unit 730 includes a passage partition wall member 731, a full tank detection lever 732, a full tank detection sensor 733, a first cover member 734, a second cover member 735, and a ball removal member 736. As the taxiway of the ball passage unit 730, the first taxiway 730C is formed between the left side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the first cover member 734 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a taxiway 730C. A second taxiway 730D is formed between the right side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side. Each of the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D has a sufficient path length capable of arranging a large number of game balls.

On the left side of the passage partition member 731, the road side wall of the first taxiway 730C is formed so as to extend from the upper introduction port 730A to the lower discharge port 730B while meandering back and forth. The road side wall formed on the left side of the passage partition member 731 forms a groove on the right half of the first taxiway 730C (see FIG. 85). On the right side of the passage partition member 731, the road side wall of the second taxiway 730D is formed so as to extend from the upper introduction port 730A to the lower discharge port 730B. The road side wall formed on the right side of the passage partition member 731 forms a groove on the left half of the second taxiway 730D (see FIG. 84). Such a second taxiway 730D is adjacent to the first taxiway 730C with a partition wall in between. That is, the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D are arranged side by side so as to guide the game ball in the same direction side by side with each other.

On the other hand, on the facing surface of the first cover member 734 facing the left side of the passage partition member 731, the road side wall of the first taxiway 730C is formed so as to extend from the introduction port 730A to the discharge port 730B while meandering back and forth. Has been done. The left side portion of the passage partition wall member 731 and the road side walls on the facing surfaces of the first cover member 734 are combined to form the first taxiway 730C, and the introduction port 730A and the discharge port 730B are formed. Further, the road side wall of the second taxiway 730D is also formed on the facing surface of the second cover member 735 facing the right side of the passage partition wall member 731 so as to extend to the discharge port 730B. The second taxiway 730D is formed by the combination of the right side portion of the passage partition wall member 731 and the road side walls on the facing surfaces of the second cover member 735. The first taxiway 730C is formed with a first width that is relatively large in the lateral direction, while the second taxiway 730D is smaller in the lateral direction than the lateral width (first width) of the first taxiway 730C. It is formed with a second width and joins the first taxiway 730C on the upstream side of the discharge port 730B. Further, the discharge port 730B is formed with a first width that is the same as the lateral width (first width) of the first taxiway 730C in the lateral direction. The introduction port 730A is conductive only to the first taxiway 730C, and basically, the game ball delivered from the ball delivery mechanism 720 enters the introduction port 730A. However, at the portion adjacent to the introduction port 730A, the ball pulling port 730a leading to the ball pulling member 736 is formed by combining the right side portion of the passage partition wall member 731 and the second cover member 735. As a result, the game ball that cannot fit in the introduction port 730A because the first taxiway 730C is clogged is guided to the ball ejection port 730a. The lower end of the second taxiway 730D is formed so as to join the first taxiway 730C in the vicinity of the discharge port 730B. As a result, when the clogging of the game balls in the vicinity of the discharge port 730B is cleared, the game balls accumulated in the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D are collectively discharged from the discharge port 730B.

FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the first taxiway 730C of the ball passage unit 730, and FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the second taxiway 730D of the ball passage unit 730. A through port 731A for guiding the game ball from the right side portion to the left side portion is formed on the upper portion of the passage partition wall member 731. On the right side of the passage partition member 731, a branch path 730E capable of guiding the game ball to the through port 731A is formed in the middle of the upper part of the first taxiway 730C. The opposite side of the through port 731A communicates with the upper end of the second taxiway 730D. As a result, when the game ball of the first taxiway 730C is clogged up to the upper part and does not flow downward, the game ball that has flowed down from the introduction port 730A to the upper part of the first taxiway 730C is the first taxiway 730C. The game ball that has been guided to the branch road 730E and further to the branch road 730E is guided to the upper end of the second taxiway 730D through the through port 731A, and is guided to the upper end of the second taxiway 730D. Not only that, the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are temporarily stored inside the ball passage unit 730 until the second taxiway 730D is filled with the game balls.

Further, on the right side of the passage partition member 731, a full tank detection lever 732 that can swing in a posture in which the tip portion protrudes in the middle of the second taxiway 730D and a tip portion of the full tank detection lever 732 protrude. A full tank detection sensor 733 that detects a state of being displaced from the posture to the back is provided. The full tank detection lever 732 is provided in a substantially vertical portion of the second taxiway 730D, and when it is pressed against a game ball that is clogged up to this portion and cannot flow down, it is in a state of being displaced to the back. When the full tank detection lever 732 displaced to the back is in contact for a predetermined time, the full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the second taxiway 730D is clogged with a game ball and is full, and responds accordingly. The signal is output to the payout / launch control circuit 123 (see FIG. 14). As a result, even if the flow of the game ball on the first taxiway 730C is stagnant, the game ball feeding operation of the ball delivery mechanism 720 can be continued until the second taxiway 730D is full.

Further, a ball removing member 736 is attached to the right side of the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The ball pulling member 736 discharges the game ball guided from the ball pulling port 730a from the lower end port 736A. The game ball discharged from the lower end port 736A of the ball pulling member 736 is guided to a ball pulling pipe (not shown), and is finally discharged to a dollar box placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

[Sphere detection unit]
FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing the out port 55 of the game board 12A, and FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing the ball detection unit 800 located behind the out port 55 with the game board 12A removed. As shown in FIG. 88, an out port 55 for guiding the game ball that has flowed down without winning a prize to the back is provided in the lower center of the game area 12a of the game board 12A. As shown in FIG. 89, behind the out port 55, a plurality of game balls guided from the out port 55 are received, and game balls are collected at a location facing the out port 55 to be further rearward. An out-ball receiving member 801 having an opening 801A for guiding the ball is provided. The ball detection unit 800 is provided in the mounting frame 410 immediately after the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801.

90 is a perspective view showing the entire sphere detection unit 800, FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view showing the sphere detection unit 800, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view showing the sphere detection unit 800 in a direction different from that of FIG. 91. is there. The ball detection unit 800 includes a left side component 810, a right side component 820, a projecting piece member 830, a first detection sensor 840, and a second detection sensor 850. The ball detection unit 800 is for detecting a game ball discharged through the out port 55 as an inflow port as an out ball. The left component 810 is provided with a first detection sensor 840, and the right component 820 is provided with a second detection sensor 850, which is integrated with the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. The left side component 810 and the right side component 820 are joined with the projecting piece member 830 sandwiched in the center. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 function as an example of an inflow port into which a plurality of game balls can flow in and a plurality of detection means capable of detecting the inflowing game balls downstream from the inflow port.

FIG. 93 is an internal side view of the left side component 810 constituting the ball detection unit 800, FIG. 94 is an internal side view of the right side component 820 constituting the ball detection unit 800, and FIG. 95 is an internal side view of the ball detection unit 800. It is a top view of the projecting piece member 830. The left side component 810 and the right side component 820 are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape, and the front opening portions 810A and 820A, the introduction space parts 810B and 820B, the sensor arrangement parts 810C and 820C, and the floating space parts 810D and 820D, respectively Have.

The front opening 810A and 820A are integrally formed with each other and are located immediately behind the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801 to form a receiving port (inflow port) for receiving the game ball passing through the opening 801A. The front opening 810A and 820A each have an opening area through which one game ball can pass with a margin. As a result, at least two game balls can enter the integrated reception port at the same time.

The introduction space portions 810B and 820B are basically passages for guiding the game balls from the front opening portions 810A and 820A to the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C, respectively, and one game ball can pass through each with a margin. The bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction space portions 810B and 820B are slightly inclined from the horizontal plane, and are formed so as to descend toward the inner side.

The sensor arranging units 810C and 820C are locations where the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are arranged, respectively. The sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C are arranged so that the front ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are slightly lower than the bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction space portions 810B and 820B. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are arranged in an inclined posture so as to be higher from the front end to the rear end, respectively. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are provided with a passing hole through which one game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passing hole, it is detected as an out ball and discharged downward. Will be collected afterwards. As a result, the game ball guided from the introduction space portions 810B and 820B to the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C is easily guided to the passage holes of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850.

The idle space portions 810D and 820D are provided downstream from the out port 55 and above the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C, and form a narrower space than the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C. The floating space portions 810D and 820D have a size sufficient for one game ball to freely play in a state of being integrated with each other. The bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da of the floating space portions 810D and 820D are slightly inclined from the horizontal plane, and are formed so as to rise (raise) toward the inner side. The front ends of the bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da are formed so as to be located higher than the rear ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. As a result, one game ball may be guided to the idle space portions 810D and 820D in the back beyond the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, and is guided to the idle space portions 810D and 820D. Even in the game ball, it is easy to fall to the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. The floating space portions 810D and 820D may be a portion having a size sufficient for two or more game balls to play in a state of being integrated with each other.

The projecting piece member 830 is provided so as to separate the introduction space portions 810B and 820B and the floating space portions 810D and 820D in addition to the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C (first detection sensor 840 and second detection sensor 850). As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the projecting piece member 830 extends from the bottom of the front opening 810A, 820A, which serves as an inflow port, from the bottom to the back so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on. It has a sloping upper end 830A that rises (raises) as it progresses from the bottom of the front openings 810A, 820A to the idle space 810D, 820D. The upper end 830A protrudes slightly upward from the bottom surfaces 810Ba, 820Ba, 810Da, and 820Da without completely partitioning the introduction space portions 810B and 820B and the floating space portions 810D and 820D. Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed so as to undulate left and right along the game ball approaching direction, and is peak-shaped so that the inflowing game ball is slippery even when riding on it. Is formed in. As a result, the game balls of the sensor arranging portions 810C and 820C easily cross the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 in the left-right direction and fall onto either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850. Further, the game ball that has advanced from the sensor arranging portions 810C and 820C to the floating space portions 810D and 820D in the back is in a state of being in an unstable contact with the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, and the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection are detected. It is shaken off to one of the sensors 850.

[Plate unit]
FIG. 96 is an overall perspective view showing the glass door 5 provided with the dish unit 900, and FIG. 97 is an overall front view showing the front surface of the glass door 5. A dish unit 900 is provided at the lower left side when facing the front of the glass door 5. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only one plate unit 900 exists, but for example, an upper plate unit and a lower plate unit may be provided, and one of them may be applied as the plate unit 900 of the present embodiment. .. The plate unit 900 stores the game balls to be paid out according to the winning, guides the stored game balls to the launching device 15, and arranges the stored game balls downward according to the player's ball pulling operation (illustrated). The game ball can be discharged to (omitted). A payout outlet 901 for paying out the game balls is provided behind the plate unit 900, and a plurality of game balls are paid out to the plate unit 900 from the payout outlet 901. Behind the payout port 901, a ball delivery / receiving member 902 for receiving the game ball from the launching device 15 and sending it out to the payout port 901 is provided (see FIG. 98).

98 is an enlarged perspective view showing the entire dish unit 900, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit 900, FIG. 100 is a top view of the dish unit 900, and FIG. 101 is a saucer cover member 930 of the dish unit 900. It is the top view of the state which removed. The plate unit 900 includes a decorative cover 910, a main body portion 920, a saucer cover member 930, a ball removal passage member 940, a lid opening / closing portion 950, and the like. The decorative cover 910 is attached to the front surface and the side surface of the dish unit 900 so as to cover the ball removing passage member 940 and the like arranged at the lower part of the main body portion 920. As shown in FIG. 99, the main body 920 is operated by an arranging portion 920A for arranging a plurality of game balls in a row on a launching device 15 inside the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and a lid opening / closing portion 950 by the player. , A first opening / closing lid 920B and a second opening / closing lid 953B for guiding the game ball to the ball removing passage member 940 are provided. The saucer cover member 930 is arranged in the upper part of the main body portion 920, and first receives and stores the game balls paid out from the payout outlet 901, and the stored game balls are moved to the lower alignment portion 920A. It is a guide. The saucer cover member 930 has an outer peripheral portion that forms a peripheral wall with a space between the cover portion 930A that covers the alignment portion 920A of the main body portion 920 from above and the outer wall 930Aa of the cover portion 930A so that the game ball can pass through. A rectifying unit 930C formed between the 930B, the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B, and guiding the game ball to the lower alignment portion 920A, and a plurality of game balls paid out from the payout port 901 are slid down. 930D, a storage unit 930E capable of flowing a plurality of game balls sliding down from the slope unit 930D to the rectifying unit 930C, and a first storage unit 930E on the bottom surface of the storage unit 930E. A first opening 930F provided above the opening / closing lid 920B is provided. In FIG. 98, the payout port 901 is not shown. In FIG. 99, the decorative cover 910 is not shown.

The aligning portion 920A of the main body portion 920 is provided so as to extend straight to the left and right at a position on the rear end side of the dish unit 900 on the right side opposite to the side on which the payout port 901 (ball sending / receiving member 902) is arranged. The alignment portion 920A is formed in a linear groove shape by the guide pieces 920Aa while descending and inclining from the right side to the left side so that a plurality of game balls flow in a line. That is, the upstream side (upstream side in the alignment direction) of the alignment portion 920A in the direction in which the game balls are aligned corresponds to the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A separated from the payout outlet 901, and the cover portion 930A is located at the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A. A game ball flows down from the rectifying unit 930C of the above. An introduction port 920Ab for guiding the game ball to the internal launching device 15 is provided at the left end portion on the downstream side of the alignment portion 920A, and is located on the bottom surface of the alignment portion 920A and above the second opening / closing lid 953B. A second opening 930G to be provided is provided. The game balls lined up in the alignment portion 920A are linearly guided to the introduction port 920Ab one by one. In such an alignment portion 920A, the right end portion is partially exposed and the remaining portion is covered by the cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930. Further, the portion of the main body 920 where the saucer cover member 930 is arranged is formed in a shape that generally matches the outer peripheral portion 930B and the rectifying portion 930C of the saucer cover member 930, the slope portion 930D, the storage portion 930E, and the first opening portion 930F. Has been done. Further, on the rectifying unit 930C side of the alignment unit 920A, a wall portion 920Ac is provided so that the game balls flowing down to the game balls aligned with the alignment unit 920A do not run on even if the cover unit 930A is not attached. Has been done. When the first opening / closing lid 920B of the main body 920 is opened by the operation of the first lid opening / closing portion 950A by the player, the game ball in the storage portion 930E of the saucer cover member 930 moves downward through the first opening 930F. It is discharged. The discharged game ball is guided to the drop port 940A located directly above the dollar box through the ball removal passage member 940, and the game ball is discharged from the drop port 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the first opening / closing lid 920B is in the closed state, the game ball of the storage unit 930E stays as it is without falling from the first opening 930F and is guided to the rectifying unit 930C. Further, when the second opening / closing lid 953B of the main body 920 is opened by the operation of the second lid opening / closing portion 950B by the player, the game balls lined up in the alignment portion 920A are discharged downward through the second opening 930G. To. The discharged game ball is guided to the drop port 940A located directly above the dollar box through the ball removal passage member 940, and the game ball is discharged from the drop port 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing lid 953B is in the closed state, the game balls lined up in the alignment portion 920A are guided from the introduction port 920Ab to the internal launching device 15 without falling from the second opening 930G.

The cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930 is located on the rear end side of the plate unit 900 at a position on the right side opposite to the side on which the payout port 901 (ball delivery receiving member 902) is arranged. The outer wall 930Aa of the cover portion 930A is formed in a curved shape, and an opening 930Ab is formed at a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A. Further, the outer peripheral portion 930B is formed in a curved shape substantially along the outer wall 930Aa so as to form the rectifying portion 930C between the outer peripheral portion 930B and the outer wall 930Aa. As a result, the rectifying unit 930C is formed as a passage that guides the game ball of the storage unit 930E to the opening 930Ab while bending it in a curved shape. Further, the outer wall portion 930Ea of the storage portion 930E and the outer peripheral portion 930B of the rectifying portion 930C have one continuous surface so that the game ball discharged from the payout port 901 rolls while contacting and reaches the rectifying portion 930C. Is forming. As a result, when the game ball is not stored in the storage unit 930E, the released game ball rolls to the outer wall portion 930Ea and is rectified while being changed in direction on the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B). It is led to the part 930C. Here, the first opening 930F capable of discharging the game ball to the outside of the storage unit 930E and the first opening / closing lid capable of switching between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside. The 920B has a predetermined distance from the continuous surface on the inner side (game board 12A side) of the storage portion 930E so that the game ball can roll while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B). It is provided. It is desirable that the predetermined interval is at least a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. This is to prevent all the game balls released from the payout port 901 from being discharged to the outside from the first opening 930F. For example, when the number of stored game balls is small, the payout port 901 The game ball released from the ball rolls while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B), and does not reach the first opening 930F and does not fall from the first opening 930F to the rectifying portion 930C. Even if the first opening / closing lid 920B is in the open state, the game ball almost falls from the first opening 930F and the game ball supplied to the launching device 15 is interrupted. Never.

The rectifying unit 930C is formed so as to be slightly downwardly inclined from the storage unit 930E toward the opening 930Ab. Further, the rectifying portion 930C is formed so as to gradually narrow in width toward the opening 930Ab by the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B. As a result, the game balls randomly piled up in the storage unit 930E flow into the opening 930Ab in a gradually bent row by the rectifying unit 930C. Further, even if there is a game ball that reaches the rectifying section 930C beyond the slope section 930D and the storage section 930E by being vigorously discharged from the payout port 901, the game ball hits the inner surface of the curved outer peripheral portion 930B. While the propulsive force is weakened, it is guided to the opening 930Ab through the rectifying section 930C.

FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the main body portion 920, the ball removing passage member 940, and the lid opening / closing portion 950 as viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 103 is an exploded view of the figure shown in FIG. 102. A lid opening / closing portion 950 is provided under the main body portion 920, and a ball removing passage member 940 is provided under the lid opening / closing portion 950.

FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the ball-extracting passage member 940, FIG. 105 is a sectional view taken along line AA'in FIG. 104, and FIG. 106 is a sectional view taken along line BB'in FIG. 104. As shown in FIG. 104, the ball removing passage member 940 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from above, extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front side, is formed in a hollow shape, and a first game ball flows down inside. It is connected to the passage 941 and the downstream end of the first passage 941, extends in the direction orthogonal to the first passage 941 (front-back direction), is formed in a hollow shape, and the game ball flows down inside, and the downstream end. A second passage 942 in which a drop port 940A having an open lower portion is formed in the portion is provided. The bottom surfaces of the first passage 941 and the second passage 942 are arranged so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, so that the game ball flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side.

The first passage 941 includes a first receiving port 941a and a second receiving port 941b for guiding the game ball into the ball removing passage member 940. The first receiving port 941a is formed at the upstream end portion under the first opening 930F (see FIG. 103) of the main body portion 920 and the first opening / closing lid 953A (see FIG. 103) of the first lid opening / closing portion 950A. The upper part is open. The first receiving port 941a protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941 and is curved so that the upper side is open. As a result, the game ball that has fallen from the first opening 930F can be smoothly guided to the inside of the first passage 941. The second receiving port 941b has a second opening 930G (see FIG. 103) of the main body 920 and a second opening / closing lid 953B (FIG. 103) of the second lid opening / closing portion 950B between the upstream end and the downstream end. It is formed under (see) and is open above. The second receiving port 941b protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941 and is curved so that the upper side is open. As a result, the game ball that has fallen from the second opening 930G can be smoothly guided to the inside of the first passage 941.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the first passage 941 forms an inclined wall 941c in which at least one side surface of two side surfaces extending in the upstream / downstream direction is inclined downward toward the bottom surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the inclined wall 941c protrudes toward the other side surface side from the middle toward the downstream end. That is, the inclined wall 941c is inclined downward toward the bottom surface and protrudes to the other side surface side. As a result, the width inside the first passage 941 gradually narrows from the middle toward the downstream end and toward the bottom surface (for example, from the width of two game balls to one game ball). It is the width of the minute). Thereby, for example, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the first passage 941, the game balls can be rectified in one row and flow down into the second passage 942. Further, the first passage 941 is oblique from the side surface side on the side where the first receiving port 941a is provided to the portion facing the first receiving port 941a (see FIG. 104) on the side surface extending in the upstream / downstream direction. A guide wall 941d extending to is formed. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the first receiving port 941a can be smoothly guided to the inside of the first passage 941.

The second passage 942 includes a corner wall 942a that forms an outer corner at the connecting portion of the first passage 941. The corner wall 942a is a portion connected from the downstream end of the first passage 941 to the upstream end of the second passage 942, and is formed in a curved shape bulging in the direction in which the game ball flows down.

FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the ball removing passage member 940. The ball removal passage member 940 is formed in a hollow shape through which a game ball can flow down by combining the first member 940a and the second member 940b with each other. The first member 940a constitutes the top surface, the bottom surface and one side surface of the first passage 941 and the top surface and two side surfaces of the second passage 942. The second member 940b constitutes the other side surface of the first passage 941 and the corner wall 942a and the bottom surface of the second passage 942. The first member 940a is formed with notches 940a'notched diagonally upward from the lower ends at the lower ends of the portions constituting the two side surfaces of the second passage 942. The second member 940b is formed with protrusions 940b'protruding diagonally upward on the two side edges of the portion forming the bottom surface of the second passage 942. The notch 940a'and the protrusion 940b' are engaged with each other when the first member 940a and the second member 940b are combined with each other, and are in the state shown in FIG. 106. Therefore, the two members can be maintained in a combined state without screwing the first member 940a and the second member 940b.

As shown in FIG. 103, the lid opening / closing portion 950 has a first lid opening / closing portion 950A for opening / closing the first opening 930F of the main body portion 920 and a second lid opening / closing portion 930G for opening / closing the second opening 930G of the main body portion 920. 2 Lid opening / closing portion 950B and The first lid opening / closing portion 950A extends from the base end arranged under the main body portion 920 to the front side, and the tip protrudes in the front direction from the main body portion 920, and the first grip portion 951A that can be operated by the player and the first grip portion 951A. 1 The first lid opening / closing part main body 952A that slidably holds the base end side of the grip portion 951A, and the first lid opening / closing part main body 952A that is fixed to the first grip portion 951A and slidably attached to the first lid opening / closing part main body 952A. A first opening / closing lid 953A that can be displaced to a closed state that closes the 930F and an open state that opens the first opening 930F is provided. As a result, the player can displace the first opening / closing lid 953A between the open state and open / close the first opening 930F by sliding the first grip portion 951A. The second lid opening / closing portion 950B extends from the base end arranged under the main body portion 920 to the front side, and the tip protrudes in the front direction from the main body portion 920, and the second grip portion 951B and the second grip portion 951B that can be operated by the player. 2 A second lid opening / closing part main body 952B that slidably holds the base end side of the grip portion 951B, a closed state that is slidably attached to the second lid opening / closing part main body 952B and closes the second opening 930G, and a second The second opening / closing lid 953B, which can be displaced to the open state to open the opening 930G, is connected to the second gripping portion 951B and the second opening / closing lid 953B, and the second opening / closing lid is moved by sliding the second gripping portion 951B. A link portion 954 that displaces the 953B between the open state and the open state is provided. As a result, the player can displace the second opening / closing lid 953B between the open states and open / close the second opening / closing portion 930G by sliding the second grip portion 951B.

[Electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment is that the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are connected to the main control circuit 70, and the payout / launch control circuit 123 is full. The point that the sensor 733 is connected and the point that the two projector device main bodies b2 are connected to the sub-control circuit 200 are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment.

The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 detect each game ball that has passed through the out port 55 (see FIG. 88) as an out ball, and output a predetermined output signal to the main control circuit 70. When the full tank detection lever 732 (see FIG. 87) displaced to the back is in contact with the full tank detection sensor 733 for a predetermined time, the second taxiway 730D (see FIG. 87) is clogged with a game ball and becomes full. It is detected that the state has been reached, and a predetermined output signal is output to the payout / launch control circuit 123. When the payout / launch control circuit 123 receives this predetermined output signal, the payout / launch control circuit 123 temporarily stops the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. Further, the full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the second taxiway 730D is not clogged with the game ball when the full tank detection lever 732 is displaced to the front side and is separated from the full tank detection sensor 733. A predetermined output signal is output to the discharge / emission control circuit 123. When the payout / launch control circuit 123 receives the predetermined output signal, the payout / launch control circuit 123 restarts the payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170, which has been temporarily stopped.

Similar to the pachinko game machine 1 or the game machine 1 of the first to third embodiments, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 according to the effect operation of other game devices and the like, and the two projector device main bodies. By projecting the irradiation light on each of b2 or in conjunction with each other and projecting the irradiation light toward the back surface of the game board 12A and the screen unit b4, the image is displayed as a visual effect.

Further, game machine components such as various sensors, various devices, and other circuits connected to the main control circuit 70 are included in the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) housed in the cover member 430 (see FIG. 75). , Is connected to the main control circuit 70 via the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69) of the game board 12A (see FIG. 69).

In the pachinko machine 1 or 1A in the above embodiment, the game balls stored in the storage plate are fired on the game board, and when a prize is awarded, the game balls are discharged from the payout device to the storage plate. , Not limited to this.

For example, a game medium such as a game ball or a medal necessary for a game is thrown in by a player, a game is played based on the game, and a privilege is given based on the result of the game, for example, a pachislot machine or a casino machine. The present invention can be applied to all of them. That is, not only the game medium is used by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out according to the game result, but also the main control circuit (main control board) itself uses the game medium owned by the player. It may be electronically managed so that the game can be played without the player touching the game medium. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) and manages the game medium. In that case, it is desirable that the game ball launched on the game board is an enclosed game machine that the player does not touch.

The game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is a device provided in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) so as to be bidirectionally communicative via a predetermined interface. It is sufficient that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game generated by the operation of lending the game medium and the operation of paying out the game medium can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or 1A based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A device for displaying the number of owned game media (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the device for displaying the number of owned game media may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal on game media handling device side Boards may be provided (both not shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is increased from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means. Upon transmission, the game media handling device discharges a recording medium recording the number of game media. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the payout device and the like inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacture of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the cost be reduced, but the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of devices. It will also be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment, the following effects are exhibited. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the projector unit b can be arranged in an inclined state at a position that does not block the projected light emitted from the projection lens b2a from the front side to the back side, so that the front side of the projector unit b can be arranged. It is possible to reduce the installation space in the direction from the back side. Further, since the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the predetermined space 405 formed between the lower portion of the projector unit b and the cover member arranged in this way, the main control board 70A can be accommodated in another place without using the predetermined space 405. Compared with the case where the main control board 70A is provided, the space can be saved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of saving space in the back mechanism.

Further, the projector unit b is arranged with one end side provided with the projection lens b2a on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the opposite end arranged on the back side, and one end side on the opposite end. By providing it so that it is lower than the side of the part, the waste heat from the projector unit b can be released diagonally upward without being trapped in the back mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and this waste heat can be released to other parts. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on precision parts.

As a result, the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the recess 431a of the cover member 430. Therefore, the main control board 70A is housed in a predetermined space 405 below the projector unit b, and the waste heat of the projector unit b is removed from the main control board 70A. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on the main control board 70A due to this waste heat. Further, by accommodating the main control board 70A in the cover member 430 arranged on the outside, maintenance of the component parts becomes easy.

Further, since the projector unit b and the mirror member b3 can be attached to the attachment base 420 provided between the attachment frame 410 and the cover member 430, it is necessary to provide the mirror member b3 so as to protrude from the front of the attachment frame 410. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately projecting the irradiation light onto the screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

Further, the width of the mounting base 420 is narrowed from the front side to the back side so that the main board 70A can be accommodated in the back portion 431 of the cover member 430, and the side surface 432 of the cover member 430 is different from the main board 70A. Since the relay board 100 can be accommodated, the limited space inside the game machine can be effectively used. Further, the cover member 430 is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and accommodates the main control board 70A so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It was provided with a possible recess 431a. As a result, by accommodating the main control board 70A in the recess 431a, the main control board 70A can be provided between the mounting base 420 and the surface of the cover member 430 so as not to protrude toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is possible to effectively use the limited space inside.

Further, the game board 12A is detachably fixed by the movable stopper attached to the mounting frame 410 arranged on the front side, and the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 are mounted on the back side of the mounting frame 410. If the member 430 is not removed, it is difficult to access the game board movable stopper 413 provided on the mounting frame 410, so that fraudulent acts can be prevented. Further, since various parts provided on the back side of the game board 12A can be attached to the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 provided on the back side of the game board 12A, for example, the game board can be mounted without changing various parts. It is possible to change only 12A, which facilitates the design of the game machine. When assembling the game machine, the game board movable stopper 413 related to the game board 12A is attached to the side surface of the mounting frame 410, and the cover member 430 containing the main control board 70A is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame 410. In this way, the mounting surfaces are configured to be different for each large category of members, such as the members related to the game board 12A and the members related to the back mechanism of the main control board 70A and the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of facilitating the design change and assembly work of the game machine and reducing the working water in the assembly work.

Further, by dividing which member is to be attached to which surface of the attachment frame 410 and assembling according to the arrangement relationship (inner circumference or back surface) of the member to be attached to the attachment frame 410, erroneous work in the assembly work can be prevented. ..

Further, a mounting base 420 is provided between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430 capable of accommodating the main control board 70A, the projector unit b is mounted on the mounting base 420, and the control board capable of controlling the game device on the cover member. By providing the mounting frame 410 with a fixing portion 411a capable of separately fixing the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed according to the type of the gaming device. .. Therefore, by forming the member covering the back mechanism with two members, the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420, the mounting base 420 is produced by the pachinko gaming machine 1A while using the cover member 430 which is a common member. By changing the shape according to the type of gaming device according to the characteristics, it becomes possible to develop a flexible model. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the versatility of the member covering the back mechanism.

Further, since the mounting base 420 to which the game device is attached cannot be operated unless the cover member 430 is removed, it is possible to prevent the game device from being removed from the outside due to mischief or the like.

Further, by attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the entire game machine. Further, by forming the member covering the back mechanism with a double structure of the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420, it is possible to further improve the rigidity of the entire game machine.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is tilted, so that when the depth dimensions are the same, the gaming mechanism such as the sub-control board 80A is compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not tilted. Since the installable area of the component parts becomes large, it becomes possible to install a wider variety of game machine components. Further, apart from the main control board 70A housed inside the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and at least two side surface portions 432, the sub control board 80A can be accommodated in the inclined side surface portion 432. Compared with the case where the sub-control board 80A is integrated on the back surface portion 431, it is possible to prevent the sub-control board 80A from protruding to the back surface portion 431 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

Further, by providing the recess 431a in the back surface portion 431 of the cover member 430, it is possible to increase the bending strength of the back surface portion 431 of the cover member 430. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the strength of the cover member covering the back side of the game machine.

Further, for example, when the main control board 70A protrudes from the back surface portion 431, an external force is applied to the protruding portion when the pachinko gaming machine 1A moves, and the possibility of damage increases. According to the present invention, the main control board 70A is housed in the recess 431a so that the surface of the back surface portion 431 is substantially flush with each other. The possibility of doing so can be reduced.

Further, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is tilted, the area where the game machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed when the depth dimension is the same, as compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not tilted. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of game machine components. Further, at least a part of the side surface portion 432 on the side opposite to the side pivotally supported by the main body 2 is inside the virtual circle VC passing through the inner side edge of the main body frame 400 with the main body frame hinge 2b of the main body frame 400 as the center. Since it is formed, the space inside the cover member 430 can be made wider and more game machine components can be arranged within a range in which the inside of the main body 2 can be rotated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

Further, since at least a part of the side surface portion 432 of the cover member 430 is formed in a shape along the virtual circle VC, the space inside the cover member 430 is further widened within a range in which the inside of the main body 2 can be rotated. It is possible to arrange many game machine components.

Further, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is tilted, the area where the game machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed when the depth dimension is the same, as compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not tilted. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of game machine components. Further, in the cover member 430, the wiring from the game board relay board 101 of the game board 12A in which the opening 432e is housed in the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and at least two side surface portions 432 is connected to the cover member 430. The relay board 100 is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100 provided on the outside, and the relay board 100 connected to the wiring via the opening 432e can be accommodated in the side surface first recess 432a. A recess 431a and a side surface second recess 432c capable of accommodating the control board 70A and the sub-control board 80A are adjacent to each other. As a result, even if it is possible to attach a wider variety of main control boards 70A, it is possible to collectively arrange various game machine components, and it is possible to shorten the cable connecting these components. Therefore, it becomes easy to check various game machine components and to handle cables and the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of simplifying the assembly work and maintenance of the game machine.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, a game that becomes a prize ball in the first taxiway 730C leading from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to the discharge port 730B inside the payout device 700 due to a temporary blockage of the outlet of the storage plate. Even if the flow of the ball is stagnant and clogged, the game ball from the ball delivery mechanism 720 detours to the second taxiway 730D through the branch road 730E and the through hole 731A branched from the upper half of the first taxiway 730C. Even if the second taxiway 730D is filled with game balls, if the blocked state near the payout port (exhaust port 730B) is resolved, the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D A large number of game balls that are full can be immediately collected and discharged from the discharge port 730B. That is, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging of the game ball inside the payout device 700 by delaying it as much as possible until the second taxiway 730D is full.

Further, since the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D are provided inside the payout device 700, there is no possibility that the game ball in the taxiway is directly touched by the player's hand, and the game ball is caused by an external factor. It is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged.

Further, in the cover member 430, the ball passage unit 730 and the accommodating portion of the substrate can be formed as an integrated unit, and by arranging the control substrate from the center of the cover member 430, the wiring can be flexed. It also makes it easier to check if the control board is fraudulent.

Further, until the second taxiway 730D is in a full tank state and the full tank detection lever 732 and the full tank detection sensor 733 detect the stagnation of the game ball, the ball delivery mechanism 720 serves as a prize ball according to the prize. The game ball can be continuously delivered. Therefore, even if the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and more game balls can be stored inside the payout device 700. Further, by changing the lateral width of the first taxiway 730C and the second taxiway 730D, it is possible to change the storage amount and the flow rate of the game balls in the first taxiway and the second taxiway. It is possible to make adjustments so that an appropriate payout operation can be performed.

Further, by arranging the second taxiway 730D so as to overlap the first taxiway 730C in a plane, the space can be effectively secured without significantly expanding the occupied space of the second taxiway 730D provided separately. Can be used. This can contribute to the miniaturization of the entire payout device 700 together with the ball passage unit 730.

In addition, the game balls stored in the second taxiway 730D in a full state can also be guided to join the discharge port 730B. As a result, a large number of game balls can be discharged from one discharge port 730B together with the game balls of the first taxiway 730C, and the ball clogging of the game balls inside the payout device 700 can be performed as quickly as possible. It can be resolved.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, and allows the game ball to enter the idle space portions 810D and 820D in the back. Since the game balls of the 810D and 820D can be shaken off to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850 along the bottom surface 810Da and 820Da while being in contact with the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, the ball detection unit. Ball biting does not occur between the game balls inside the 800, and as a result, the ball clogging of the game balls in the vicinity of the out port 55 can be effectively prevented.

Further, since the projecting piece member 830 can guide the game balls to be distributed to the left and right from the front to the back along the direction in which the game balls enter, there is no risk of ball biting between the game balls, and the first The game ball can be smoothly guided to either the detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

Further, since the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed so as to rise (raise) toward the back side, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the floating space portions 810D and 820D. It is possible to make it easier to gradually drop the game ball onto either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850, and at the front portion of the upper end 830A, the first detection without restricting the traveling direction of the game ball. It can be guided to either the sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

Further, the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, but does not completely partition them, and the upper end 830A has a peak shape, so that the entered game ball is not caught. It can be smoothly guided to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

According to the pachinko game machine 1A, since the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A, the game board on the back side of the game board 12A is compared with the case where the game board 12A is mounted on the surface. It is possible to reduce the installation space of the relay board 101. Further, by covering the first special winning opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, the cover member 430 is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 can be connected to the connector connecting portion 101a from the outside of the cover member 430 through the opening. And at least the outer part of the game board relay board 101 was covered with a cover member. Therefore, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from an external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 is pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board is attached with the cover member 430 attached. Since the connector can be attached to and detached from the 101, it is possible to improve the workability of assembling and maintaining the game machine.

Further, since the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A, the installation space of the game board relay board 101 on the back surface side of the game board 12A is compared with the case where the game board relay board 101 is mounted on the game board 12A on a surface. Can be suppressed. Further, by making the game board relay board 101 foldable so as to be parallel to the game board 12A, the game board 12A to which the game board relay board 101 is attached can be transported or stacked as needed (for example, the game board 12A to which the game board relay board 101 is attached can be transported or stacked. Since the game board relay board 101 can be folded, it is less likely that an external force will be applied to the game board relay board 101 compared to the case where the game board relay board 101 is left to protrude vertically from the game board 12A. Therefore, the risk of damage to the game board relay board 101 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing the risk of damage to the board while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back surface side of the game board.

Further, the cover member 430 is provided with an opening 432e at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 is connected to the connector connection portion 101a from the outside of the cover member 430 via the opening 432e. Arranged so that the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connection portion 101a faces the opening 432e in a state where at least the outer portion of the game board relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430. did. Therefore, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from an external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 is pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board is attached with the cover member 430 attached. Since the connector can be attached to and detached from the 101, it is possible to improve the workability of assembling and maintaining the game machine.

Further, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is tilted, the area where the game machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed when the depth dimension is the same, as compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not tilted. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of game machine components. Further, since the game machine component can be accommodated in the inclined side surface portion 432, the game machine component protrudes to the back surface portion 431 of the game machine as compared with the case where the game machine component is integrated on the back surface portion 431. It becomes possible to suppress. Further, by providing the opening 432e at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101 on the inclined side surface portion 432, the cover member 430 can be covered while suppressing the installation space of the game board relay board 101 on the back surface side of the game board 12A. It is possible to increase the installable area of the game machine component on the side surface portion 432.

Further, since the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 12A, the installation space of the game board relay board 101 on the back surface side of the game board 12A is compared with the case where the game board relay board 101 is mounted on the game board 12A on a surface. Can be suppressed. Further, by covering the first special winning opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, the side surface second recess 432c and the recess 431a capable of accommodating the main control board 70A and the sub control board 80A are arranged adjacent to the side surface first recess 432a capable of accommodating the relay board 100, and the side surface first recess is provided. Since the 432a is provided with an opening 432e that can be connected to the wiring from the game board 12A, the parts provided in the game board 12A and the main control board 70A and the sub control board housed in the side second recess 432c and the recess 431a are provided. The wiring length with each of the 80A can be shortened. Therefore, it becomes easy to check various game machine components and to handle cables and the like.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the first guide gutter 416 and the cover member of the mounting frame 410 are overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. The other opening of any of the second guide gutters 434 of the 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of the one opening and is connected so that the other opening is inserted into the one opening. The game ball is ready to flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the other opening are roughly aligned without being strictly aligned. By simply stacking them, the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 are overlapped by aligning the rough positions. The other opening of the 434 is guided by the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of the one opening, and the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into the one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes a state. Further, one of the openings of the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the fourth guide gutter of the cover member 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of the one opening, and the other opening is one. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening of the gutter, the game ball can flow down. As described above, one of the openings of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the other opening, and the third guide gutter 418 and the cover member 430 of the mounting frame 410 Even if one of the openings of the fourth guide gutter and the other opening are not strictly aligned, the other opening can be inserted into one opening simply by roughly aligning and overlapping them. Since the game ball is in a state where it can flow down, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of assembly. Further, the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 and the third guide gutter 418 and the fourth guide gutter can be positioned at two connecting portions when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410. Therefore, more accurate positioning is possible by roughly aligning the positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 are overlapped by aligning the rough positions. A state in which the game ball can flow down by guiding the other opening of the 434 to the rib 434b of the receiving portion of the one opening and connecting the other opening so as to insert it into the one opening. It becomes. Further, one of the openings of the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the fourth guide gutter of the cover member 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion of the one opening, and the other opening is one. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening, the game ball can flow down. As described above, one of the openings of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the other opening, and the third guide gutter 418 and the cover member 430 of the mounting frame 410 Even if one of the openings of the fourth guide gutter and the other opening are not strictly aligned, the other opening can be inserted into one opening simply by roughly aligning and overlapping them. Since the game ball is in a state where it can flow down, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of assembly. Further, the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 and the third guide gutter 418 and the fourth guide gutter can be positioned at two connecting portions when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410. Therefore, more accurate positioning is possible by roughly aligning the positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, in the assembling work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410, the cover members 430 are overlapped with their rough positions aligned. At this time, even if the positions of the openings are slightly different from each other, by pushing the cover member 430, the other opening is guided by the inclination of the rib 434b of the one opening, and the rib 434b is guided from the outer edge to the inner edge side. It moves to, fits into the portion surrounded by the inner edge, is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, and the game ball is in a state where it can flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the other opening are roughly aligned without being strictly aligned. By simply stacking them, the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 are overlapped by aligning the rough positions. The engaging portion 416a of the other opening of the 434 is guided by the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of the one opening, and at the connection position, fits into the portion surrounded by the rib 434b and fits into the one opening. By connecting the other opening so as to be inserted, the game ball can flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the other opening are roughly aligned without being strictly aligned. By simply stacking them, the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, when the other opening is guided by the rib 434b of the one opening, the outer edge of the opening of the other opening abuts on the rib 434b, but at this time, a force is applied to the outer edge of the opening to open the opening. It may be deformed and hinder the flow of the game ball after connection. According to the present invention, by providing the engaging portion 416a on the outer edge of the opening of the other opening, the engaging portion 416a is brought into contact with the rib 434b to reduce the force applied to the outer edge of the opening. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being hindered.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the game ball released from the payout port 901 rolls along the outer wall portion 930Ea while being in contact with the outer wall portion 930Ea, and further rolls along the continuous curved outer peripheral portion 930B. It is guided to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion 920A, and in the alignment portion 920A, a plurality of game balls are aligned so as to form a straight line and guided to the introduction port 920Ab. At that time, even if the first opening / closing lid 953A provided in the first opening 930F is in the open state, the game ball released from the payout port 901 does not fall into the first opening 930F and is outer peripheral from the outer wall portion 930Ea. It is guided from the rectifying section 930C to the aligning section 920A while rolling along the section 930B. Therefore, while the rectifying unit 930C secures a relatively long path length from the outlet 901 to the alignment unit 920A, the outer wall portion 930Ea and the alignment unit 920A of the storage unit 930E are prevented from falling from the first opening 930F. The outer peripheral portion 930B is formed at a predetermined interval from the first opening 930F, and the outer peripheral portion 930B is formed in a curved shape, so that the outer peripheral portion 930B is smoothly dropped and discharged from the rectifying portion 930C to the aligned portion 920A. It is possible to guide the game ball without letting it.

Further, the game ball discharged from the payout port 901 is guided to bypass the rectifying unit 930C without directly reaching the arranging unit 920A, and then is guided from the rectifying unit 930C to the arranging unit 920A, and is guided to the arranging unit 920A. It is guided to the introduction port 920Ab in a straight lined state. This also allows the game ball to be smoothly guided from the rectifying unit 930C to the aligning unit 920A without clogging the ball.

Further, since the rectifying portion 930C and the aligning portion 920A are formed on the outside and the inside of the cover portion 930A, the path length from the payout port 901 to the aligning portion 920A can be secured relatively long. The width dimension and installation space of the entire plate unit 900 can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to prevent the released game balls from riding on the game balls aligned with the alignment unit 920A, causing the alignment to be disturbed and causing ball clogging, or the game balls to jump out of the plate unit 900.

Further, by forming the curved rectifying section 930C, the path length from the payout port 901 to the aligning section 920A can be secured to be relatively long, so that the width dimension and the installation space of the entire dish unit 900 can be increased. It can be suppressed, and the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rectifying unit 930C to the aligning unit 920A.
In the present embodiment, the alignment portion 930C is formed between the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B of the cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930 itself, but a cover member that merely covers the alignment portion is provided. In addition to the alignment portion, a slope portion and a storage portion may be provided between the outside of the cover member and the curved inner peripheral portion of the dish unit main body portion.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other game machines, and can be applied to, for example, bullet game machines and enclosed game machines. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as a gaming machine, a slot machine, a pachislot gaming machine, and the like, in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Further, it goes without saying that the numerical values, information, components and the like shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

(About Appendix 1)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-205001). The structure on the game board generally includes a light emitting body such as an LED. Also, this type of structure may act as a movable body.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if light is projected from a projector in order to project an image on a light emitting region of a light emitting body in a structure (movable body), it is easily visually recognized as white and blurred. It is considered that this is because the light of the image reflected on the structure and the light from the light emitter are mixed and the brightness is enhanced by the additive color mixing. As a result, it is not possible to project a clear image, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is spoiled in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing the aesthetic appearance as a directing effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A movable body that can operate as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, light emission by the light emitting means, and projection of an image by the projection means. And
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting means and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting means can be transmitted is provided.
The effect control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, at least a region other than the transmissive region of the cover member (for example, a non-transmissive member 685) or the transmissive region where light from the light emitting means is not transmitted is set as a projection target. It is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, in the region other than the transmission region or the transmission region of the cover member, the light of the reflected image and the light from the light emitter are not mixed, and the brightness is not emphasized by the additive color mixing. Therefore, a clear image can be projected on the cover member of the movable body, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention
A movable body that can operate as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, light emission by the light emitting means, and projection of an image by the projection means. And
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting means and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting means can be transmitted is provided.
The effect control means
When the light emitting means is not made to emit light, an image can be projected by the projection means with at least the transmission region of the cover member as a projection target.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected in the transmission region of the cover member and the light from the light emitter are not mixed, and the brightness is not emphasized by the additive color mixing. Therefore, the cover member of the movable body A clear image can be projected on the transparent area of the light, and the aesthetic effect can be enhanced as a directing effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The cover member has at least a part of a non-transmissive region (for example, non-light emitting region 684b, 684b', etc.) in which light from the light emitting means is not transmitted as a region other than the transmissive region.
The effect control means is characterized in that the non-transmissive region of the cover member is included in the projection target and an image can be projected by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, a clear image can be projected even on the non-transmissive region of the cover member, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The cover member has the non-transparent region on the peripheral edge portion.
The effect control means is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means with at least a part of the peripheral portion of the cover member as a projection target.

According to such a configuration, a clear image can be projected even on the peripheral portion of the cover member, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

(About Appendix 2)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-205001). The structure on the game board generally includes a light emitting body such as an LED. Also, this type of structure may act as a movable body.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if light is projected from a projector in order to project an image on a light emitting region of a light emitting body in a structure (movable body), it is easily visually recognized as white and blurred. It is considered that this is because the light of the image reflected on the structure and the light from the light emitter are mixed and the brightness is enhanced by the additive color mixing. As a result, it is not possible to project a clear image, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is spoiled in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing the aesthetic appearance as a directing effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A movable body that can operate as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, light emission by the light emitting means, and projection of an image by the projection means. And
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting means and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting means can be transmitted is provided.
The effect control means
When an image is projected by the projection means with the transmission region of the cover member as a projection target, the light emission means emits light after the brightness of the emission is relatively reduced as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means. It is characterized by being possible.

According to such a configuration, the degree of mixing of the light of the image reflected in the transmission region of the cover member and the light from the light emitter is weakened, and the emphasis of brightness due to the additive color mixing is suppressed. A clear image can be projected on the transparent area, and the aesthetic effect can be enhanced as a directing effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The cover member has at least a part of a non-transmissive region (for example, a non-transmissive member 685, a non-light emitting region 684b, 684b', etc.) in which light from the light emitting means is not transmitted as a region other than the transmissive region.
The effect control means is characterized in that the non-transmissive region of the cover member is included in the projection target and an image can be projected by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, a clear image can be projected even on the non-transmissive region of the cover member, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The cover member has the non-transparent region on the peripheral edge portion.
The effect control means is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means with at least a part of the peripheral portion of the cover member as a projection target.

According to such a configuration, a clear image can be projected even on the peripheral portion of the cover member, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

(About Appendix 3)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, an electronic shutter is provided in front of the symbol display area, and by lowering the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is regarded as a non-transparent area to hide the symbol. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-559942).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the transmittance is maximized by not operating the electronic shutter in the normal state, the symbol must be visually recognized through the electronic shutter itself, so that the symbol as identification information looks dim. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to secure visibility in a timely manner.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is a game in which visibility can be ensured in a timely manner while enabling an effect of hiding identification information, and as a result, the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as an effect of the effect. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A movable body (for example, reel accessory 67) that is provided with identification information (for example, an identification symbol) and can operate as an effect,
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body and the projection of an image by the projection means.
The movable body is
A sheet member on which the identification information is drawn (for example, a sheet member 671) and
A moving means for moving the seat member (for example, a rotary gear 673, a motor 674, etc.) is provided.
The sheet member
The drawing area of the identification information (for example, blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), etc.) and
It has a background area other than the drawing area (for example, blank 671C).
The drawing area is formed based on the first color system (for example, red or blue).
The background region is formed based on a second color system (for example, white or gray) different from the first color system.
The effect control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an image can be projected onto the sheet member by the projection means in a color similar to that of the first color system.

According to such a configuration, by projecting an image on the sheet member with a color similar to the first color system of the drawing area in which the identification information is drawn, the identification information seems to be blended into the image of the similar color. As a result, it becomes invisible or difficult to see, but if such an image is not projected, the identification information can be directly seen. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that hides the identification information while ensuring timely visibility. As a result, the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The movable body includes a light emitting means (for example, LED677) capable of irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the seat member.
The effect control means
It is possible to control the light emission by the light emitting means.
When an image is projected onto the sheet member by the projection means, the light emission by the light emitting means can be stopped, or the brightness of the light emission is relatively lowered by the light emitting means as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means. It is characterized in that it can emit light on the surface.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected on the sheet member and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the emphasis of brightness due to the additive color mixing is suppressed. The drawing area can be sufficiently blended into the image of similar colors, and the identification information can be surely hidden.

(About Appendix 4)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, an electronic shutter is provided in front of the symbol display area, and by lowering the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is regarded as a non-transparent area to hide the symbol. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-559942).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the transmittance is maximized by not operating the electronic shutter in the normal state, the symbol must be visually recognized through the electronic shutter itself, so that the symbol as identification information looks dim. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to secure visibility in a timely manner.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is a game in which visibility can be ensured in a timely manner while enabling an effect of hiding identification information, and as a result, the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as an effect of the effect. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A movable body (for example, reel accessory 67) that is provided with identification information (for example, an identification symbol) and can operate as an effect,
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body and the projection of an image by the projection means.
The movable body is
A sheet member on which the identification information is drawn (for example, a sheet member 671) and
A moving means for moving the seat member (for example, a rotary gear 673, a motor 674, etc.) is provided.
The sheet member
The drawing area of the identification information (for example, blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), etc.) and
It has a background area other than the drawing area (for example, blank 671C).
The drawing area is formed based on the first color system (for example, red or blue).
The background region is formed based on a second color system (for example, white or gray) different from the first color system.
The effect control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to continuously execute a series of effect operations (for example, pseudo-ream) in which the seat member is moved by the moving means and then stopped.
When the sheet member is stopped, the first effect state that makes the identification information of the drawing area visible, and
It is characterized in that it can be controlled to a second effect state in which an image is projected onto the sheet member by the projection means in a color similar to that of the first color system while the sheet member is stopped or moving. To do.

According to such a configuration, the seat member is continuously moved and stopped a plurality of times, and in the first effect state in which the seat member is stopped, the identification information of the drawing area can be directly visually recognized, for example, at the end. When the sheet member is stopped or in the second effect state during rotation, the identification information is blended into the image of the same color by projecting the image on the sheet member in the same color as the first color system of the drawing area. Since it becomes invisible or difficult to see because it looks like this, it is possible to secure the visibility in a timely manner while making it possible to produce an effect that hides the identification information, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the aesthetic appearance as an effect of the effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The movable body includes a light emitting means (for example, LED677) capable of irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the seat member.
The effect control means
It is possible to control the light emission by the light emitting means.
It is characterized in that, in the second effect state, the light emission by the light emitting means can be stopped, or the light emission means can emit light after the brightness of the light emission is relatively lower than that in the first effect state.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected on the sheet member and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the emphasis of brightness due to the additive color mixing is suppressed. The drawing area can be sufficiently blended into the image of similar colors, and the identification information can be surely hidden.

(About Appendix 5)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-205001). The structure on the game board generally includes a light emitting body such as an LED. Also, this type of structure may act as a movable body.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if light is projected from a projector in order to project an image on a light emitting region of a light emitting body in a structure (movable body), it is easily visually recognized as white and blurred. It is considered that this is because the light of the image reflected on the structure and the light from the light emitter are mixed and the brightness is enhanced by the additive color mixing. As a result, it is not possible to project a clear image, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is spoiled in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing the aesthetic appearance as a directing effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, a display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the display of an image by the display means and the projection of an image by the projection means.
The display means
A predetermined image can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area in the display area.
The effect control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an image can be projected by the projection means with at least an area other than the predetermined drawing area in the display area as a projection target.

According to such a configuration, the light of the reflected image and the light of the display image are not mixed in the area other than the predetermined drawing area in the display area, and the brightness is not emphasized by the additive color mixing. , A clear image can be projected on the display area of the display means, and the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as a directing effect.

The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, a display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the display of an image by the display means and the projection of an image by the projection means.
The display means
A predetermined image can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area in the display area.
The effect control means
When the predetermined image is not displayed in the predetermined drawing area in the display area, it is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means with the predetermined drawing area as at least a projection target.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected in the predetermined drawing area in the display area and the light of the display image are not mixed, and the brightness is not emphasized by the additive color mixing, so that the predetermined drawing is performed. A clear image can be projected on the area, and the aesthetic effect can be enhanced as a directing effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
At least a part of an area other than the predetermined drawing area on which an image is projected by the projection means is displayed in a single display color of black or gray.

According to such a configuration, by projecting an image onto a black or gray region, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be enhanced, and as a result, the aesthetic appearance can be enhanced as an effect.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
When the predetermined image is not displayed in the predetermined drawing area in the display area, the predetermined drawing area is characterized in that it is in a single display state in black.

According to such a configuration, by projecting an image onto a predetermined drawing area in a black display state, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be enhanced, which in turn enhances the aesthetic effect as an effect. be able to.

(About Appendix 6)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a transparent protective plate provided on the front surface of the game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-75624). The game board is provided with a liquid crystal display unit, and the projected image on the protective plate can be formed so as to overlap the display image of the liquid crystal display unit.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if light is projected from a projector in order to project an image on a protective plate located in front of a liquid crystal display unit, it is easily visually recognized as white and blurred. It is considered that this is because the light of the image reflected on the protective plate and the light from the liquid crystal display unit are mixed and the brightness is enhanced by the additive color mixing. As a result, it is not possible to project a clear image, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is spoiled in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing the aesthetic appearance as a directing effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, a display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A movable body that can operate as a production (for example, the decorative part 68A of the movable accessory 68),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) including an image display by the display means, an image projection by the projection means, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body. Etc.)
The effect control means
The movable body can be moved so as to be positioned in front of the display area.
An image can be projected by the projection means from the front side of the movable body as a projection target.
A predetermined image related to the image projected on the movable body can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area (for example, a non-overlapping area) that does not correspond to the position of the movable body in the display area, and the predetermined image is displayed. An image can be hidden from an area other than the drawing area (for example, an overlapping area), or can be formed based on a predetermined color system.

According to such a configuration, an integrated display image can be formed by the image projected on the movable body and the predetermined image displayed in the predetermined drawing area. In addition, the light of the image reflected by the movable body and the light of the predetermined image do not mix, and the light of the projected image is easily reflected even in an area other than the predetermined drawing area. Since the brightness is not emphasized, a clear image can be projected on the movable body located in front of the display area, and the aesthetic effect can be enhanced.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The movable body includes a light emitting means (for example, LED681) capable of emitting light as an effect.
The effect control means
When an image is projected onto the movable body by the projection means, the light emission by the light emitting means can be stopped, or the brightness of the light emission is relatively lowered by the light emitting means as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means. It is characterized in that it can emit light on the surface.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected by the movable body and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the emphasis of brightness due to the additive color mixing is suppressed. The image can be projected clearly, and the visibility of the image and the image can be ensured.

(About Appendix 7)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, an electronic shutter is provided in front of the symbol display area, and by lowering the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is regarded as a non-transparent area to hide the symbol. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-559942).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the symbol as the identification information is only visible / invisible by changing the transmittance of the electronic shutter, only a visually monotonous effect can be obtained. There was a drawback that it lacked the interest of directing.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of visually performing various effects and, by extension, enhancing the interest of the effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A display means capable of displaying an image as an effect (for example, a front liquid crystal device 13') and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A structure (for example, a movable accessory 68) arranged on the back side of the display means and
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the display of an image by the display means and the projection of an image by the projection means.
The display means
While the back side can be seen through, it has a transparent display area (for example, front liquid crystal panel 13C) capable of displaying an image.
The structure is arranged on the back side of the transparent display area.
The effect control means
The display means can be switched between a first state in which at least a part of the transparent display area cannot be seen through or difficult, and a second state in which at least a part of the transparent display area can be seen through. ,
In the first state, an image can be projected by the projection means with at least a part of the transparent display area as a projection target.
In the second state, it is possible to project an image by the projection means with the structure as a projection target while passing through at least a part of the transparent display area.

According to such a configuration, in the first state, the image projected on the transparent display area and the displayed image can be directly visually recognized, while in the second state, the structure is transparent through the transparent display area. Since the image projected on the body can be visually recognized, it is possible to visually perform various effects, and by extension, the interest of the effects can be enhanced.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The transparent display region is characterized in that, in the first state, it is formed based on a uniform predetermined color system (for example, black or gray).

According to such a configuration, for example, by projecting an image onto a transparent display area having a uniform predetermined color system of black or gray, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be improved. As a result, the aesthetics can be enhanced as a directing effect.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The structure includes a light emitting means (for example, LED681) capable of emitting light as an effect.
The effect control means
In the second state, when an image is projected onto the structure by the projection means, the light emission by the light emitting means can be stopped, or the light is emitted by the light emitting means as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means. It is characterized in that it can emit light after its brightness is relatively lowered.

According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected by the structure and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the emphasis of brightness due to the additive color mixing is suppressed. The image can be projected clearly, and the visibility of the image can be ensured.

(About Appendix 8)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-205001). The structure on the game board generally includes a light emitting body such as an LED. Also, this type of structure may act as a movable body.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if light is projected from a projector in order to project an image on a light emitting region of a light emitting body in a structure (movable body), it is easily visually recognized as white and blurred. It is considered that this is because the light of the image reflected on the structure and the light from the light emitter are mixed and the brightness is enhanced by the additive color mixing.

Further, depending on the position of the structure, the projection angle of the projector becomes wide, and the wider the projection angle, the blurry the image. As a result, it is not possible to project a clear image, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is spoiled in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing the aesthetic appearance as a directing effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, etc.) capable of emitting light as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling light emission by the plurality of light emitting means and projection of an image by the projection means.
The projection means is fixedly arranged at a predetermined position, and the projection means is fixedly arranged.
The plurality of light emitting means include
A first light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66A) arranged at a position where the optical distance from the projection means is the first distance, and
A second light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66C) arranged at a position where the optical distance from the projection means is a second distance longer than the first distance is included.
The effect control means
An image can be projected by the projection means with a predetermined region including at least the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, the front surface of the game board 12) as a projection target.
When projecting an image by the projection means, at least the second light emitting means can emit light after lowering the brightness of the light emission as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projection means, the light from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means and the light of the image reflected in a predetermined region are mixed, but the light from the projection means The brightness of the light emitted from the second light emitting means at a position where the optical distance is relatively long is reduced. As a result, the degree to which the light from the first light emitting means and the light of the image are mixed with each other and the degree to which the light from the second light emitting means and the light of the image are mixed are balanced. A clear image can be projected by adjusting the light, and the visibility of the image can be ensured.

The gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, etc.) capable of emitting light as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling light emission by the plurality of light emitting means and projection of an image by the projection means.
The projection means is fixedly arranged at a predetermined position, and the projection means is fixedly arranged.
The plurality of light emitting means include
A first light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66A) arranged at a position forming a first angle with respect to a projection axis (for example, an optical axis X or the like) direction of the projection means, and
A second light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66C) arranged at a position forming a second angle larger than the first angle with respect to the projection axis direction of the projection means is included.
The effect control means
An image can be projected by the projection means with a predetermined region including at least the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means as a projection target.
When projecting an image by the projection means, at least the second light emitting means can emit light after lowering the brightness of the light emission as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projection means, the light from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means and the light of the image reflected in a predetermined region are mixed, but the projection means The brightness of the light emitted by the second light emitting means at a position where the angle with respect to the projection axis direction is relatively large is reduced. As a result, the degree to which the light from the first light emitting means and the light of the image are mixed with each other and the degree to which the light from the second light emitting means and the light of the image are mixed are balanced. A clear image can be projected by adjusting the light, and the visibility of the image can be ensured.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The effect control means
When projecting an image by the projection means, the first light emitting means can emit light after lowering the brightness of the light emission as compared with the case where the image is not projected by the projection means.
It is characterized in that the degree of reducing the brightness of the light emission of the first light emitting means is larger than the degree of reducing the brightness of the light emitted by the second light emitting means.

According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projection means, the brightness of the light emitted by the first light emitting means is also reduced, and the brightness of the light emitted by the first light emitting means is the brightness of the second light emitting means. Since the brightness of the light emission is greatly reduced, the intensity of the light generated by mixing these lights and the light of the image can be made uniform as much as possible, and a clear image is projected with more uniform light adjustment. be able to.

(About Appendix 9)
Some conventional game machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-205001). The structure on the game board generally includes a light emitting body such as an LED. Also, this type of structure may act as a movable body.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the image projected on the structure (movable body) is only visible, only a visually monotonous effect can be obtained, and the effect of the effect is lacking. was there.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of visually performing various effects and, by extension, enhancing the interest of the effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, a display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A movable body that can operate as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) including an image display by the display means, an image projection by the projection means, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body. Etc.)
The effect control means
The movable body can be moved so as to be positioned in front of the display area.
An image can be projected by the projection means from the front side of the movable body as a projection target.
A predetermined image related to an image projected on the movable body can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area located behind the movable body in the display area.

According to such a configuration, the image projected on the movable body can be visually recognized, while when the predetermined drawing area located behind the movable body is looked into, a predetermined image related to the projected image can be visually recognized. Since the image can be visually recognized, it is possible to visually perform a variety of productions, which in turn enhances the interest of the production.

In a preferred embodiment of the invention
An image common to both the image projected on the movable body and the predetermined image can be displayed in an area other than the predetermined drawing area in the display area.

According to such a configuration, an integrated display image can be formed by an image projected on a movable body or an image commonly displayed together with a predetermined image.

(About Appendix 10)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, a liquid crystal display panel is provided in front of the reel so that the symbol drawn on the reel can be visually recognized through the light transmission region of the liquid crystal display panel, and the light is transmitted so as to overlap the symbol. Some images can be displayed in the region (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-321553).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the image is simply displayed in the light transmission region together with the symbol as the identification information when the rotation of the reel is stopped, only a visually monotonous effect can be obtained, which is a hobby of the effect. There was a drawback that it was chipped.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of visually performing various effects and, by extension, enhancing the interest of the effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
Identification information display means (for example, reel accessory 67) capable of variable display and stop display of identification information as an effect,
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) including a variable display and a stop display of identification information by the identification information display means, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling projection of an image by the projection means. 1 etc.)
The identification information display means has a display unit (for example, an opening 12b) for variable display and stop display of the identification information.
The effect control means
It is characterized in that an image can be projected onto the display unit by the projection means while the identification information is variablely displayed on the display unit.

According to such a configuration, when an image is projected onto the display unit during the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the variable display is in progress or the stop display is in progress, so that it is visually versatile. It is possible to provide a game machine that can perform a production and, by extension, enhance the interest of the production.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The effect control means is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means to a region around the outside including the display unit.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to project an image larger than the display unit, it is possible to perform a wider variety of effects.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The effect control means projects a predetermined image only on the display unit by the projection means, and then expands the predetermined image to a region around the outside including the display unit, and then projects the image. It is characterized in that it can be projected by means.

According to such a configuration, a predetermined image projected on the display unit can be gradually enlarged to appear larger than the display unit, so that a wider variety of effects can be produced.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A game board (for example, a game board 12) having a game area (for example, a game area 12a) on which a game ball can roll is provided.
The effect control means is characterized in that an image can be projected by the projection means to an area other than the game area.

According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to switch from the state of projecting an image on the display unit to the state of projecting an image on an area other than the game area. Can be enhanced.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The effect control means is characterized in that the identification information can be projected as an image by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, for example, the identification information can be physically displayed in a variable manner or stopped by a reel, and such identification information can be projected as an image, which can enhance the interest of the production.

(About Appendix 11)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, a liquid crystal display panel is provided in front of the reel so that the symbol drawn on the reel can be visually recognized through the light transmission region of the liquid crystal display panel, and the light is transmitted so as to overlap the symbol. Some images can be displayed in the region (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-321553).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the image is simply displayed in the light transmission region together with the symbol as the identification information when the rotation of the reel is stopped, only a visually monotonous effect can be obtained, which is a hobby of the effect. There was a drawback that it was chipped.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of visually performing various effects and, by extension, enhancing the interest of the effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
Identification information display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 13) capable of variable display and stop display of identification information as an effect, and
Projection means that can project images as a production (for example, projector unit B),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) including a variable display and a stop display of identification information by the identification information display means, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling projection of an image by the projection means. 1 etc.)
The identification information display means has a display unit (for example, a display area 13a) for variable display and stop display of a plurality of identification information.
The effect control means
During the variable display of a plurality of identification information on the display unit, a dynamic predetermined image linked to the variable display of the plurality of identification information can be projected onto an area around the outside of the display unit by the projection means. It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to project a dynamically predetermined image on the outer peripheral area of the display unit so as to be linked to the variable display of a plurality of identification information, so that visually various effects can be produced. It is possible to provide a game machine that can enhance the interest of the production.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The plurality of identification information is composed of a plurality of numbers.
The predetermined image is characterized in that a continuous number or the same number is included with respect to the plurality of identification information being displayed in a variable manner on the display unit.

According to such a configuration, it seems that a plurality of continuous numbers or a plurality of the same numbers are integrally aligned and displayed in a variable manner from the display unit to the outer peripheral area, so that a more versatile effect can be produced. It can be done, and the interest of the production can be enhanced.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
Equipped with a game board having a game area in which the game ball can roll,
The identification information display means is provided on the game board, and is provided on the game board.
The effect control means is characterized in that the predetermined image can be projected onto an area other than the game area by the projection means.

According to such a configuration, for example, in a game board of a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined image can be projected on an area other than the game area where the visibility is not hindered by the game ball, and the interest of the production can be enhanced.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13801). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have the configuration and function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

(About Appendix 12)
Conventionally, on the back surface of a game area, a game machine in which a projected image emitted from a projector arranged diagonally when viewed from the side is reflected forward by a reflector and the reflected projected image is projected on a screen is disclosed. (See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-33251). According to such a game machine, the projected image emitted from the projector can be projected on the screen.

However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2004-33251, the obliquely arranged projector (or reflector) requires extra space in the depth direction, although space in the vertical direction can be saved, and the surrounding space is required. Since a triangular dead space is generated between the parts and the parts, there is a problem that the back mechanism of the game machine becomes large.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and saving space in the back mechanism.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a projection device (for example, a projector unit b) capable of projecting a predetermined image, a reflection unit (for example, a mirror member b3) capable of reflecting the projected light emitted from the projection device, and the above. A gaming machine (eg, a gaming machine) including a screen portion (for example, the screen portion b4) that projects the predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting portion, and a cover member (for example, the cover member 430) that covers the back surface of the gaming machine. , Pachinko game machine 1A)
The projection device includes a projection image generation device (for example, a projector device main body b2) capable of generating the projection light, a storage case (for example, a projector cover b1) capable of accommodating the projection image generation device, and the projection image generation. It includes an irradiation unit (for example, a projection lens b2a) that emits projected light from the apparatus.
The irradiation unit is provided on one end side of the storage case.
The one end side of the storage case is arranged on the front side of the game machine, the opposite end side of the one end side is arranged on the back side, and the one end side is arranged on the opposite end side. By providing it so as to be lower, a predetermined space (for example, space 405) is formed between the lower portion of the storage case and the cover member at a position that does not block the projected light emitted from the irradiation unit. And
A game machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) was housed in the predetermined space.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a projection device, a reflection unit, a screen unit, and a cover member. The projection device can project a predetermined image. The reflecting unit can reflect the projected light emitted from the projection device. The screen unit projects a predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting unit. The cover member covers the back surface of the game machine. Further, the projection device includes a projection image generation device capable of generating the projection light, a storage case capable of accommodating the projection image generation device, and an irradiation unit for emitting the projection light from the projection image generation device.
The irradiation unit is provided on one end side of the storage case, and the one end side of the storage case is arranged on the front side of the game machine, and the opposite end on the one end side is arranged on the back side. In addition, by providing one end side so as to be lower than the other end side, it is a position that does not block the projected light emitted from the irradiation part, and is predetermined between the lower part of the housing case and the cover member. Space was formed, and game machine components were housed in this predetermined space.

As a result, the projection device can be arranged in an inclined state at a position that does not block the projected light emitted from the irradiation unit in the front side to the back side direction, so that the installation space in the front side to the back side direction of the projection device can be arranged. Can be suppressed. Further, since the game machine component can be accommodated in a predetermined space formed between the lower portion of the projection device and the cover member arranged in this way, the game mechanism in another place can be accommodated without using the predetermined space. Space can be saved as compared with the case where the component parts are provided. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of saving space in the back mechanism.

Further, one end side provided with the irradiation portion is arranged on the front side of the game machine, the opposite end portion is arranged on the back side, and one end side is provided so as to be lower than the opposite end side. As a result, the waste heat from the projection device can be released diagonally upward without being trapped inside the back mechanism of the game machine, and it is possible to prevent this waste heat from adversely affecting other precision parts. Become.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the cover member is provided with a recess (for example, a recess 431a) protruding into the predetermined space.
The gaming machine component can be accommodated in the recess.

As a result, the game machine component can be accommodated in the recess of the cover member, so that the game machine component is protected from the waste heat of the projection device while being housed in a predetermined space below the projection device. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on game machine components due to waste heat. Further, by accommodating the game machine component in the cover member arranged on the outside, the maintenance of the component becomes easy.

(About Appendix 13)
Conventionally, a projector that projects irradiation light from the back side of the cabinet to the front side, a reflector that is placed on the upper part of the front side of the cabinet and reflects the irradiation light projected from the projector to the back side of the cabinet, and a reflector A game machine including a screen on which the reflected light emitted from the projector is projected from the front side is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-5677). According to such a game machine, the irradiation light projected from the projector can be reflected by the reflector on the front side and projected on the screen on the back side.

However, although it is necessary to provide a reflector in order to properly project the irradiation light from the projector onto the screen in the limited space inside the game machine, the game machine of JP-A-2016-5677 is a reflector. Is provided on the front side, so there is a problem that the upper part of the game machine pops out forward and spoils the aesthetic appearance.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light onto a screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a projection device (for example, a projector unit b) capable of projecting a predetermined image, a reflection unit (for example, a mirror member b3) capable of reflecting the projected light emitted from the projection device, and the above. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a screen unit (for example, screen unit b4) that projects the predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting unit.
A mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame and capable of accommodating a game machine component (for example, a main board 70A). 430) and a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member are further provided.
The mounting base is
The projection device and the reflection unit are attached,
The width of the side surfaces facing each other (for example, the side surface 432) becomes narrower from the front side to the back side.
The cover member is formed so as to project from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the game machine, and can accommodate the game machine component so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member toward the back surface of the game machine. For example, it is provided with a recess 431a).

A game machine having such a configuration includes a projection device, a reflection unit, and a screen unit. The projection device can project a predetermined image. The reflecting unit can reflect the projected light emitted from the projection device. The screen unit projects a predetermined image by the projected light reflected by the reflecting unit. Further, the game machine further includes a mounting frame, a cover member, and a mounting base. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame and can accommodate game machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. A projection device and a reflecting portion are attached to the mounting base, and the widths of the side surfaces facing each other become narrower from the front side to the back side, and the cover member is from the surface of the cover member to the inside side of the game machine. It is provided with an accommodating portion that is formed so as to project so as not to project the game machine components from the surface of the cover member to the back side of the game machine.

As a result, the projection device and the reflecting portion can be attached to the mounting base provided between the mounting frame and the cover member, so that it is not necessary to provide the reflecting portion so as to protrude from the front of the mounting frame. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of appropriately projecting the irradiation light onto the screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the player.

Further, the width of the mounting base is narrowed from the front side to the back side, the cover member is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the game machine, and the game machine component is formed from the surface of the cover member. It is equipped with a storage unit that can be stored so that it does not protrude to the back side of the game machine. As a result, by accommodating the game machine components in the accommodating portion, it is possible to provide the game machine components between the mounting base and the surface of the cover member so as not to protrude toward the back surface side of the game machine, so that the inside of the game machine is limited. It is possible to effectively use the space.

(About Appendix 14)
Conventionally, a game machine in which a cover member is formed of a transparent resin so as to cover the back surface side of the game board and the cover member is attached to a machine frame via a hinge mechanism has been disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-46686). .. According to such a game machine, various parts on the back surface side of the game board can be confined in the closed space between the game board and the cover member.

However, the machine frame has a member to be attached in addition to the game board, and when the cover member is attached to the back surface side of the game board as in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-46686, the game board is attached. There are problems that it becomes difficult to secure space, the design inside the game machine is restricted, and the assembly work of the game machine becomes complicated.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and facilitating the design and assembly work of the game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a gaming machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a cover member (for example, a cover member 430).
A game board (for example, a game board 12A) having a game area (for example, a game area 12a) is provided.
The game board is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the mounting frame.
A movable stopper (for example, a game board movable stopper 413) for detachably fixing the game board is attached to the inner surface of the mounting frame.
The cover member is attached to the back surface of the attachment frame so as to cover the movable stopper.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame. A movable stopper for detachably fixing the game board is attached to the inner surface of the mounting frame, and a cover member is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame so as to cover the movable stopper.

As a result, the game board was detachably fixed by the movable stopper attached to the mounting frame arranged on the front side, and the cover member was attached to the back side of the mounting frame. By making it difficult to access the movable stopper provided on the frame, fraudulent activity can be prevented. Further, since various parts provided on the back side of the game board can be attached to the cover member provided on the back side of the game board, for example, it is possible to change only the game board without changing various parts. The design of the game machine becomes easy. Further, when assembling the game machine, the movable stopper related to the game board is attached to the side surface of the mounting frame, and the cover member containing the game machine components is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame. The mounting surfaces are configured to be different for each large category of members, such as related members and members related to the back mechanism such as game machine components. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of facilitating the design change and assembly work of the game machine and reducing the working water in the assembly work.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention has the above-mentioned configuration.
A mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member is provided.
At least one of the mounting base and the cover member is mounted on the back surface of the mounting frame.

In this way, by separating which member is to be attached to which surface of the mounting frame, it is possible to prevent erroneous work in the assembling work by assembling according to the arrangement relationship (inner circumference or back surface) of the members to be attached to the mounting frame. ..

(About Appendix 15)
Conventionally, a cover member for covering the back surface of the mechanism panel exposed to the rear of the main frame is provided, and a control circuit board is arranged on the surface of the bulging portion of the cover member facing the back surface of the pachinko machine. A game machine is disclosed (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-57482). According to such a game machine, the control circuit board can be attached to a cover member for covering the back surface of the mechanism board.

However, on the back side of the game machine, in addition to the control circuit board, a game device according to the model of the game machine is provided. In the game machine of JP-A-2004-57482, the control circuit board can be attached to the cover member, but when the game device changes depending on the model, for example, the cover member comes into contact with the game device. In some cases, the cover member cannot be attached, and there is a problem that the cover member lacks versatility.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of improving the versatility of the member covering the back mechanism.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a gaming machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) and a mounting base (for example, a mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. There,
The mounting base is
A gaming device (eg, a projector unit b) capable of performing game-related controls is attached.
A control board capable of controlling the gaming device is attached to the cover member.
The mounting frame is provided with a fixing portion (for example, fixing portion 411a) capable of separately fixing the mounting base and the cover member.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame, a cover member, and a mounting base. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame and can accommodate game machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. A game device capable of executing control related to the game is attached to the mounting base, a control board capable of controlling the game device is attached to the cover member, and the mounting base and the cover member are attached to the mounting frame. It has a fixing part that can be fixed separately.

As a result, a mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member capable of accommodating the game machine components, the game device is mounted on the mounting base, and the control board capable of controlling the game device is mounted and mounted on the cover member. By providing the frame with a fixing portion capable of separately fixing the mounting base and the cover member, the shape of the mounting base can be changed according to the type of the gaming device. Therefore, by configuring the member that covers the back mechanism with two members, the cover member and the mounting base, the game device that matches the mounting base to the effect characteristics of the game machine while using the cover member that is a common member. By changing the shape according to the type of, it is possible to develop a flexible model. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the versatility of the member covering the back mechanism.

Further, by attaching the cover member to the mounting frame, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the entire game machine. Further, by forming the member covering the back mechanism with a double structure of the cover member and the mounting base, it is possible to further improve the rigidity of the entire game machine.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention has the above-mentioned configuration.
The fixing portion can fix the cover member so as to cover the fixing portion between the mounting frame and the mounting base after first fixing the mounting frame and the mounting base.

As a result, since the mounting base to which the game device is attached cannot be operated unless the cover member is removed, it is possible to prevent the game device from being removed from the outside by mischief or the like.

(About Appendix 16)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing the main board is arranged under the base cover attached to the board so as to face and cover the back surface of the board, and an effect control board is placed inside the back side of the base cover. A game machine in which the housed effect control board case is arranged is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144146). According to such a game machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

However, in recent years, there has been a tendency for production devices such as image display devices to become larger in size, so that various substrates are covered with a cover member that covers the back side of the game board, as in the game machine of JP2014-144146. When attached to the back surface of the board, there is a problem that the case for accommodating the board protrudes greatly in the depth direction.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and a cover member (for example, cover member 430) capable of accommodating game machine components and covering the mounting base from the back side. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1A)
The cover member is a first game machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) inside a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, a back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, a side surface portion 432). ) Can be accommodated,
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base.
The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion (for example, a mounting portion 433) that can be mounted on the mounting base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the mounting portion. It is formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface.
A second game machine component (a second game machine component different from the first game machine component) formed on the inclined side surface portion on the outside of the cover member so as to project from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the game machine. For example, an accommodating portion (for example, a side surface second recess 432c) capable of accommodating the sub-control board 80A) was provided.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting base and a cover member. The cover member is
The game machine component can be accommodated, the mounting base is covered from the back side, and the first game machine component can be accommodated in the space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions.
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion that can be mounted on the mounting base on the end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion provided with the mounting portion to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do. Further, a second game machine component different from the first game machine component is accommodated on the inclined side surface portion on the outside of the cover member so as to project from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the game machine. It has a possible containment.

As a result, at least one of the side surface portions of the cover member is tilted, so that when the depth dimension is the same, the installable area of the second game machine component becomes larger than when the side surface portion is not tilted. It is possible to attach a wider variety of game machine components. Further, apart from the first game machine component accommodated inside the space formed from the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions, the second game machine component can be accommodated in the inclined side surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine components from protruding toward the back side of the game machine, as compared with the case where the game machine components are integrated on the back surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

(About Appendix 17)
Conventionally, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame that can be fixed to island equipment, a main body frame base that is pivotally supported by the outer frame, and a transparent back cover that is rotatably supported at the rear end of the main body frame base. The game board, which is held by the main body frame base whose rear side is covered by the back cover and has a game area, and the game area of the game board can be seen from the player side and can be opened and closed at the front end of the main body frame base. A game machine including the door frame is disclosed (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-223516). According to such a game machine, the rear end of the main body frame base can be covered with a back cover.

However, the back cover of the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223516 is formed of a flat plate, and may be damaged when an impact is applied from the outside. Game machine components such as various substrates are attached to the back side of the game machine covered with such a cover member, and if the cover member is damaged, the game machine components may also be damaged. In addition, there is a risk that fraudulent acts may be performed on the game machine components from the damaged portion of the cover member.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of improving the strength of a cover member covering the back side of the game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and game machine components (for example, main control board 70A), and a cover member (for example, a cover) that covers the mounting base from the back side. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including the member 430).
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine component in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base.
The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion (for example, a mounting portion 433) that can be mounted on the mounting base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the mounting portion. It is formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface.
The back surface portion has a recess (for example, recess 431a) capable of accommodating the game machine component.
By accommodating the game machine component in the recess, the surface of the back surface is substantially flush with each other.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting base and a cover member. The cover member can accommodate the gaming machine components, covers the mounting base from the back side, and can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components within the space formed by the back surface and at least two side surfaces. Is. The width of the back surface is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion that can be mounted on the mounting base on the end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion provided with the mounting portion to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do.
Then, the back surface portion has a recess that can accommodate the game machine component, and by accommodating the game machine component in the recess, the surface of the back surface becomes substantially flush with each other.

As a result, by providing the concave portion on the back surface portion of the cover member, it is possible to increase the bending strength of the back surface portion of the cover member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the strength of the cover member covering the back side of the game machine.

Further, for example, when the game machine component protrudes from the back surface portion, an external force is applied to the protruding portion when the game machine is moved, and the possibility of damage is increased. According to the present invention, by accommodating the game machine components in the recesses and making the surface of the back surface substantially flush with each other, the game machine components can be damaged by applying an external force when the game machine is moved or the like. The sex can be reduced.

(About Appendix 18)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing the main board is arranged under the base cover attached to the board so as to face and cover the back surface of the board, and an effect control board is placed inside the back side of the base cover. A game machine in which the housed effect control board case is arranged is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144146). According to such a game machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

However, in recent years, there has been a tendency for production devices such as image display devices to become larger in size, so that various substrates are covered with a cover member that covers the back side of the game board, as in the game machine of JP2014-144146. When attached to the back surface of the board, there is a problem that the case for accommodating the board protrudes greatly in the depth direction.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a game machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. A main body frame (for example, main body frame 400) having a certain cover member (for example, cover member 430) and a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member.
A game including an outer frame (for example, the main body 2) that rotatably supports the main body frame around a rotation shaft (for example, the main body frame hinge 2b) extending in the vertical direction in the vicinity of one side edge. A machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1A)
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine component in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a main body frame having a mounting frame, a cover member, and a mounting base, and an outer frame. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame and can accommodate game machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. The outer frame rotatably supports the main body frame around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the vicinity of one side edge.
Then, the cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine components within the space formed from the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions. The width of the back surface is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base. Further, the side surface portion on the other side edge side is formed inside a virtual circle centered on the rotation axis and passing through the inner side edge of the outer frame.

As a result, at least one of the side surface portions of the cover member is tilted, so that when the depth dimension is the same, the installable area of the game machine component is larger than when the side surface portion is not tilted, which is more diverse. It becomes possible to attach game machine components. Further, since at least a part of the side surface portion on the side opposite to the side pivotally supported by the outer frame is formed inside the virtual circle passing through the inner side edge of the outer frame with the rotation axis of the main body frame as the center, the outer frame is formed. The space inside the cover member can be made wider and more game machine components can be arranged within the range in which the inside of the cover member can be rotated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, at least a part of the side surface portion on the other side edge side is formed in a shape along the virtual circle (for example, virtual circle VC).

As a result, at least a part of the side surface of the cover member is formed in a shape along a virtual circle, so that the space inside the cover member can be further widened within a range in which the inside of the outer frame can be rotated, and more games can be played. It is possible to arrange machine components.

(About Appendix 19)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing the main board is arranged under the base cover attached to the board so as to face and cover the back surface of the board, and an effect control board is placed inside the back side of the base cover. A game machine in which the housed effect control board case is arranged is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144146). According to such a game machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

However, in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144146, since the various boards are separated from each other, the cable connecting these boards becomes long and the assembly work of the game machine becomes complicated. Further, for example, when a problem occurs in the game machine and it is not possible to identify which board causes the error, it is necessary to check the boards that are separated from each other one by one, which causes a problem that maintenance becomes complicated.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and simplifying the assembly work and maintenance of the game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and game machine components (for example, main control board 70A) including electrical parts, and is a cover member that covers the mounting base from the back side. (For example, a cover member 430) and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine component in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base.
The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion (for example, a mounting portion 433) that can be mounted on the mounting base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the mounting portion. It is formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface.
The cover member is
An opening (for example, an opening 432e) provided so that wiring from a game machine component housed inside the space can be connected to a game machine component provided on the outside of the cover member.
A specific accommodating portion (for example, a side surface first recess 432a) provided on the outer surface of the side surface portion and capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component (for example, a relay board 100) connected to the wiring through the opening. )When,
General accommodation provided on the outer surface of the cover member and composed of at least two or more accommodating portions capable of accommodating a plurality of other types of game machine components (for example, main control board 70A and sub control board 80A). A portion (for example, a side surface second recess 432c, a recess 431a) is provided.
In the general accommodating portion, at least two or more of the accommodating portions are adjacent to the specific accommodating portion.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting base and a cover member. The cover member is
The game machine component can be accommodated, the mounting base is covered from the back side, and at least a part of the game machine component can be accommodated in the space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions.
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion that can be mounted on the mounting base on the end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion provided with the mounting portion to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do. Further, the cover member includes an opening, a specific accommodating portion, and a general accommodating portion. The opening is provided so that the wiring from the game machine component housed inside the space can be connected to the game machine component provided on the outside of the cover member. The specific accommodating portion is provided on the outer surface of the side surface portion and can accommodate a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring through the opening. The general accommodating portion is provided on the outer surface of the cover member, and is composed of at least two accommodating portions capable of accommodating each of a plurality of other types of gaming machine components, and at least two or more accommodating portions are specific accommodating portions. Adjacent to.

As a result, at least one of the side surface portions of the cover member is tilted, so that when the depth dimension is the same, the installable area of the game machine component is larger than when the side surface portion is not tilted, which is more diverse. It becomes possible to attach game machine components. Further, in the cover member, the opening is provided with the wiring from the game machine component housed inside the space formed from the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions, and the wiring is provided on the outside of the cover member. It is provided so that it can be connected, and a specific game machine component connected to wiring via an opening can be stored in the specific storage part, and a plurality of other types of game machine components are housed in this specific storage part. At least two possible containments were adjacent. As a result, even if it is possible to attach a wider variety of game machine components, it is possible to collectively arrange various game machine components, and it is possible to shorten the cable connecting these components. Therefore, it becomes easy to check various game machine components and to handle cables and the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of simplifying the assembly work and maintenance of the game machine.

(About Appendix 20)
Conventionally, a game machine having a storage plate for storing a game ball and having a detour that guides the game ball paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage plate. It is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-87343). According to such a game machine, it is possible to suppress the local stagnation of the game ball in the storage dish.

However, in the game machine of JP-A-2016-87343, if the detour that is exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his or her hand on the storage plate, the game ball guided by the detour stagnates. Therefore, there is a problem that the ball is immediately clogged inside the payout means leading to this detour.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and preventing clogging of a game ball inside the payout means as much as possible.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism capable of delivering a game ball (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) for discharging the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out balls.
The payout means has a ball passage unit (for example, a ball passage unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port.
The ball passage unit is
A first guide unit (for example, the first taxiway 730C) that guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port, and
A second guide unit (for example, a second taxiway 730D) is provided in the middle of the first guide unit so that the game ball can be collected and is guided to the discharge port while storing the collected game ball.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball passage unit. As a payout means, a game ball can be paid out. The sending mechanism can send a game ball. The discharge port discharges the game ball sent from the sending mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guide portion and a second guide portion. The first guidance unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guide unit makes it possible to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit, and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing them.

As a result, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide portion leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnant, the game ball is received by the second guide portion in the middle of the first guide portion, and the second guide portion is received. The game balls stored in the can also be guided to the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of delaying and preventing clogging of the game ball inside the payout means as much as possible.

Further, since the ball passage unit is provided inside the payout means, there is no possibility that the ball passage unit is directly touched by the player's hand, and it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged due to an external factor.

In addition to the above configuration, the game machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and game machine components, and a cover member (for example, a cover member) that covers the mounting base from the back side. 430) and, further equipped,
The ball passage unit is arranged at the end of the cover member.
The cover member is provided with a housing portion (for example, recess 431a) capable of accommodating a control board (for example, main control board 70A) on which electronic components are mounted, closer to the center than the arrangement position of the ball passage unit. There is.

As a result, in the cover member, the ball passage unit and the accommodating portion of the substrate can be formed as an integrated unit, and by arranging the control substrate from the center of the cover member, it is possible to give flexibility to the wiring. It becomes possible, and it becomes easy to confirm whether the control board is fraudulent.

(About Appendix 21)
Conventionally, a game machine including a reserve storage unit for storing game balls overflowing from a storage plate and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out from a payout device (payout means) has been disclosed (special feature). (See Kai 2006-26246). According to such a game machine, when the payout ball detection switch detects that the storage plate is full, the game balls can be guided to the reserve storage unit to store a large amount of the game balls.

However, in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-26246, since there is only one ball receiving port (outlet port for discharging the game ball) of the storage dish, the player unknowingly puts his / her hand near the ball receiving port. If the ball receiving port is blocked by such means, the ball is clogged inside the payout device, and as a result, the payout ball detection switch erroneously detects the full state, and the payout operation is immediately interrupted. was there.

Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem, and even if the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and a large number of game balls are stored inside the payout means. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism capable of delivering a game ball (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) for discharging the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out balls.
The payout means has a ball passage unit (for example, a ball passage unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port.
The ball passage unit is
A first guide unit (for example, the first taxiway 730C) that guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port, and
A second guide unit (for example, the second taxiway 730D), which is provided so as to be able to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing the collected game balls.
A detection means capable of detecting the flow state of the game ball in the second induction unit (for example, a full tank detection lever 732 and a full tank detection sensor 733) is included.
The sending mechanism sends out the game ball until the detection means detects the stagnation of the game ball.
The first guide portion is formed with a first width in the lateral direction.
The second guide portion is formed with a second width in the lateral direction.
The second induction portion merges with the first induction portion on the upstream side of the discharge port.
The outlet is formed with the first width in the lateral direction.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball passage unit. As a payout means, a game ball can be paid out. The sending mechanism can send a game ball. The discharge port discharges the game ball sent from the sending mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guide unit, a second guide unit, and a detection means. The first guidance unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guide unit makes it possible to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit, and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing them. The detecting means can detect the flow state of the game ball in the second guiding unit. The sending mechanism sends out the game ball until the detection means detects the stagnation of the game ball. The first guide portion is formed with a first width in the lateral direction, and the second guide portion is formed with a second width in the lateral direction, and joins the first guide portion on the upstream side of the discharge port. The outlet is formed with a first width in the lateral direction.

As a result, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide portion leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnant, the game ball is received from the middle of the first guide portion to the second guide portion, and further, the second guide portion is received. The game ball can be continuously transmitted by the transmission mechanism until the tank is full and the detection means detects the stagnation of the game ball. Therefore, even if the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and it is possible to provide a game machine capable of storing more game balls inside the payout means. Further, by changing the lateral width of the first guide portion and the second guide portion, it is possible to change the storage amount and the flow rate of the game balls in the first guide portion and the second guide portion, which is more appropriate. It is possible to adjust so that the payout operation can be performed.

(About Appendix 22)
Conventionally, a game machine having a storage plate for storing a game ball and having a detour that guides the game ball paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage plate. It is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-87343). According to such a game machine, it is possible to suppress the local stagnation of the game ball in the storage dish.

However, in the game machine of JP-A-2016-87343, if the detour that is exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his or her hand on the storage plate, the game ball guided by the detour stagnates. Therefore, there is a problem that the ball is immediately clogged inside the payout means leading to this detour. Further, if a margin is provided in the guideway inside the payout means so that the ball is less likely to be clogged, there is a problem that the entire payout means becomes large.

Therefore, the present invention can solve such a problem, prevent the game ball from being clogged inside the payout means as much as possible, and can reduce the size of the payout means as a whole. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism capable of delivering a game ball (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) for discharging the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out balls.
The payout means has a ball passage unit (for example, a ball passage unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port.
The ball passage unit is
A first guide unit (for example, the first taxiway 730C) that guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port, and
A second guide unit (for example, a second taxiway 730D), which is provided so as to be able to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing the collected game balls, is included.
The second guide portion is attached to the first guide portion.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball passage unit. As a payout means, a game ball can be paid out. The sending mechanism can send a game ball. The discharge port discharges the game ball sent from the sending mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guide portion and a second guide portion. The first guidance unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guide unit makes it possible to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit, and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing them. The second induction unit is attached to the first induction unit.

As a result, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide portion leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnant, the game ball is received by the second guide portion in the middle of the first guide portion, and the second guide portion is received. The game balls stored in the can also be guided to the discharge port. Further, the second guide portion can be secured without significantly expanding the occupied space by being attached to the first guide portion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of delaying and preventing clogging of the game ball inside the payout means as much as possible, and reducing the size of the entire payout means together with the ball passage unit.

(About Appendix 23)
Conventionally, a game machine having a storage plate for storing a game ball and having a detour that guides the game ball paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage plate. It is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-87343). According to such a game machine, it is possible to suppress the local stagnation of the game ball in the storage dish.

However, in the game machine of JP-A-2016-87343, if the detour that is exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his or her hand on the storage plate, the game ball guided by the detour stagnates. Therefore, there is a problem that the ball is immediately clogged inside the payout means leading to this detour.

Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of ejecting a gaming ball from one place and preventing clogging of the gaming ball inside the payout means as much as possible. The purpose is to provide.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism capable of delivering a game ball (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) for discharging the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out balls.
The payout means has a ball passage unit (for example, a ball passage unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port.
The ball passage unit is
A first guide unit (for example, the first taxiway 730C) that guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port, and
With a second taxiway (for example, the second taxiway 730D), which is provided so as to be able to collect the game balls in the middle of the first taxiway and guides the collected game balls so as to join the discharge port while storing the collected game balls. including.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball passage unit. As a payout means, a game ball can be paid out. The sending mechanism can send a game ball. The discharge port discharges the game ball sent from the sending mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guide portion and a second guide portion. The first guidance unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guide unit makes it possible to collect the game balls in the middle of the first guide unit, and guides the collected game balls to the discharge port while storing them. The first guide portion and the second guide portion merge with each other at the discharge port.

As a result, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide portion leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnant, the game ball is received by the second guide portion in the middle of the first guide portion, and the second guide portion is received. The game balls stored in the can also be guided to join the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of discharging the game ball from one discharge port and preventing the ball clogging of the game ball inside the payout means as much as possible.

(About Appendix 24)
Conventionally, there is disclosed a game machine in which two passage holes are provided behind the out openings of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between these two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a game machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

However, in the game machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large amount of out balls flowing into the out port is generated, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously crowded with the guide surface as a barrier, and the game balls are so-called bridges. Since there is a risk of ball biting, there is still a problem that ball clogging occurs.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging at a place where a plurality of game balls flow in.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inflow port (for example, an out port 55) through which a plurality of game balls can flow in, and a plurality of detection means (for example, first) capable of detecting the inflowing game balls downstream from the inflow port. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) equipped with a detection sensor 840 and a second detection sensor 850).
Downstream from the inflow port, a space portion (for example, a space portion) having one or more game balls movably provided above the plurality of detection means and having a slope-like bottom surface that rises as the game balls flow in. The floating space section 810D, 820D) is provided.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a space portion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detecting means can detect the game ball that has flowed in downstream from the inflow port. The space portion has a slope-shaped bottom surface that is provided behind the plurality of detecting means so that the game ball can move downstream from the inflow port and rises as the game ball advances in the inflow direction.

As a result, the game ball can enter the space downstream from the inflow port, and the game ball in the space can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface, so that the game balls may bite each other. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging near the inflow port.

(About Appendix 25)
Conventionally, there is disclosed a game machine in which two passage holes are provided behind the out openings of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between these two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a game machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

However, in the game machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large amount of out balls flowing into the out port is generated, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously crowded with the guide surface as a barrier, and the game balls are so-called bridges. Since there is a risk of ball biting, there is still a problem that ball clogging occurs.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging at a place where a plurality of game balls flow in.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inflow port into which a plurality of game balls can flow in (for example, front openings 810A and 820A) and a plurality of detection means (for example, a plurality of detection means capable of detecting a game ball inflowing behind the inflow port). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) equipped with a first detection sensor 840 and a second detection sensor 850).
It is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on, and is formed in a wavy shape along the inflow direction of the game ball. A protrusion (for example, a protrusion member 830) was provided.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detecting means can detect the game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on, and is formed in a wavy shape along the inflow direction of the game ball. Will be done.

As a result, the game balls can be fluidly guided from the front to the back along the direction in which the game balls flow in from the inflow port, so that there is no risk of ball biting between the game balls and the balls near the inflow port. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing clogging.

(About Appendix 26)
Conventionally, there is disclosed a game machine in which two passage holes are provided behind the out openings of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between these two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a game machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

However, in the game machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large amount of out balls flowing into the out port is generated, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously crowded with the guide surface as a barrier, and the game balls are so-called bridges. Since there is a risk of ball biting, there is still a problem that ball clogging occurs.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging at a place where a plurality of game balls flow in.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inflow port into which a plurality of game balls can flow in (for example, front openings 810A and 820A) and a plurality of detection means (for example, a plurality of detection means capable of detecting a game ball inflowing behind the inflow port). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) equipped with a first detection sensor 840 and a second detection sensor 850).
It is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on it, and is inclined so as to advance in the inflow direction. It was provided with a protrusion (eg, a protrusion member 830) having an upper end (eg, upper end 830A) of the.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detecting means can detect the game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on, and rises as the game ball advances in the inflow direction. It has a slanted upper end.

As a result, a protrusion is provided so as to gradually separate the plurality of detection means from the front to the back along the direction in which the game ball flows in from the inflow port, and any of the plurality of detection means can be used on the front side of the protrusion. Also, the game ball can be guided, and the game ball can be guided to either detection means at the back side of the protrusion, so there is no risk of ball biting between the game balls, and the ball is clogged near the inflow port. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be effectively prevented.

In addition to the above configuration, the game machine of the present invention is provided in the back in the inflow direction from the protrusion, and has a slope-shaped bottom surface that rises as the game ball advances in the inflow direction (for example, the floating space portion 810D). , 820D).

As a result, the game ball can enter the space part in the back while the protrusion part separates the plurality of detection means, and the game ball in the space part can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging in the vicinity of the inflow port without the possibility of ball biting between balls.

(About Appendix 27)
Conventionally, there is disclosed a game machine in which two passage holes are provided behind the out openings of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between these two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a game machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

However, in the game machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large amount of out balls flowing into the out port is generated, a plurality of game balls are simultaneously crowded with the guide surface as a barrier, and the game balls are so-called bridges. Since there is a risk of ball biting, there is still a problem that ball clogging occurs.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging at a place where a plurality of game balls flow in.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inflow port into which a plurality of game balls can flow in (for example, front openings 810A and 820A) and a plurality of detection means (for example, a plurality of detection means capable of detecting a game ball inflowing behind the inflow port). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) equipped with a first detection sensor 840 and a second detection sensor 850).
It is located between the plurality of detection means, and extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on it, and has a peak shape extending along the inflow direction of the game ball. A protrusion (eg, protrusion member 830) having an upper end (eg, upper end 830A) was provided.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detecting means can detect the game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on, and extends along the direction in which the game ball flows in. It has a peak-shaped upper end.

As a result, although the protrusions are provided so as to separate the plurality of detection means, the upper end of the protrusions has a peak shape, so that there is no risk of ball biting between the game balls, and the vicinity of the inflow port. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging.

In addition to the above configuration, the game machine of the present invention is provided in the back in the inflow direction from the protrusion, and has a slope-shaped bottom surface that rises as the game ball advances in the inflow direction (for example, the floating space portion 810D). , 820D).

As a result, the game ball can enter the space part in the back while the protrusion part separates the plurality of detection means, and the game ball in the space part can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of effectively preventing ball clogging in the vicinity of the inflow port without the possibility of ball biting between balls.

(About Appendix 28)
Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter sequentially arranged between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame and an outer frame arranged behind the fixing plate are provided, and the fixing plate and the outer frame are provided with an outer frame. Each display opening is provided so that the display object arranged behind the liquid crystal panel can be seen from the front surface side of the liquid crystal panel, and is provided on the circuit board support plate vertically provided on the back side of the peripheral portion of the outer frame. , A game machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-230859). According to such a game machine, by providing the circuit board support plate vertically on the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board as compared with the case where the circuit board is mounted on the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (picture, etc.) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, since the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, and the circuit board support plate is hit. When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint portion between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board. To do.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 12A) provided with a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 12a) and electrical components (for example, a first large winning opening) provided on the back surface side of the gaming board. Solenoid 53b), a substrate to which the wiring portion of the electric component is connected (for example, a game board relay board 101), and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) provided on the back side of the game board and covering the electric component. ), And a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
The board is provided with a connector connecting portion (for example, a connector connecting portion 101a).
The board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board.
The cover member is provided with an opening (for example, an opening 432e) at a position corresponding to the substrate.
The substrate extends from the outside of the cover member to a position where a connection operation to the connector connection portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a game board, electrical components, a substrate, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electric parts are provided on the back side of the game board. Wiring parts of electrical components are connected to the board. The cover member is provided on the back side of the game board and covers the electric components.
The board is provided with a connector connection portion and is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board. The cover member is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate. The substrate extends from the outside of the cover member to a position where connection operation with respect to the connector connection portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member.

As a result, since the board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board, it is possible to reduce the installation space of the board on the back surface side of the game board as compared with the case where the board is mounted on the game board on the surface. Further, by covering the electric component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electric component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, the cover member is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate, and the substrate is extended to a position where a connection operation can be performed from the outside of the cover member to the connector connection portion through the opening, and at least outside the substrate. The part was covered with a cover member. Therefore, while protecting the board from external impacts, it is possible to pull out the connector connected to the board to the outside of the cover member, or to attach / detach the connector to / from the board with the cover member attached. It is possible to improve the workability of machine assembly and maintenance.

(About Appendix 29)
Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter sequentially arranged between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame and an outer frame arranged behind the fixing plate are provided, and the fixing plate and the outer frame are provided with an outer frame. Each display opening is provided so that the display object arranged behind the liquid crystal panel can be seen from the front surface side of the liquid crystal panel, and is provided on the circuit board support plate vertically provided on the back side of the peripheral portion of the outer frame. , A game machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-230859). According to such a game machine, by providing the circuit board support plate vertically on the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board as compared with the case where the circuit board is mounted on the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (picture, etc.) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, since the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, and the circuit board support plate is hit. When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint portion between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of reducing the risk of damage to the board while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board. To do.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a game board (for example, a game board 12A) provided with a game area (for example, a game area 12a) and an electric component (for example, a first large winning opening) provided on the back surface side of the game board. A gaming machine including a solenoid 53b) and a substrate (for example, a game board relay board 101) to which wiring portions of the electric components are connected, and the board stands substantially at right angles to the game board. It can be installed and can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a game board, electrical components, and a substrate. The game board includes a game area. The electric parts are provided on the back side of the game board. Wiring parts of electrical components are connected to the board.
The substrate can be erected at a substantially right angle to the game board and can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board.

As a result, since the board can be erected at a substantially right angle to the game board, it is possible to reduce the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board as compared with the case where the board is mounted on the game board on the surface. In addition, by making the board foldable so as to be parallel to the game board, the board can be transported as needed (for example, when the game board to which the board is attached is transported or stored in layers). Since the board can be folded, the possibility that an external force is applied to the board is reduced and the risk of the board being damaged can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is left to protrude vertically from the game board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing the risk of damage to the board while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back surface side of the game board.

In addition to the above configuration, the game machine of the present invention further includes a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) provided on the back side of the game board and covering the electric component.
The board is provided with a connector connecting portion (for example, a connector connecting portion 101a).
The cover member is provided with an opening (for example, an opening 432e) at a position corresponding to the substrate.
The substrate is extended from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where a connection operation to the connector connection portion can be performed, and at least the outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member. The wiring insertion port (for example, the wiring insertion port 101b) of the connector connection portion is arranged so as to face the direction of the opening.

As a result, the cover member is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate, and the substrate extends through the opening to a position where the connection operation from the outside of the cover member to the connector connection portion can be performed, and at least the substrate. The wiring outlet of the connector connection portion was arranged so as to face the opening direction while the outer portion was covered with the cover member. Therefore, while protecting the board from external impacts, it is possible to pull out the connector connected to the board to the outside of the cover member, or to attach / detach the connector to / from the board with the cover member attached. It is possible to improve the workability of machine assembly and maintenance.

(About Appendix 30)
Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter sequentially arranged between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame and an outer frame arranged behind the fixing plate are provided, and the fixing plate and the outer frame are provided with an outer frame. Each display opening is provided so that the display object arranged behind the liquid crystal panel can be seen from the front surface side of the liquid crystal panel, and is provided on the circuit board support plate vertically provided on the back side of the peripheral portion of the outer frame. , A game machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-230859). According to such a game machine, by providing the circuit board support plate vertically on the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board as compared with the case where the circuit board is mounted on the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (picture, etc.) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, since the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, and the circuit board support plate is hit. When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint portion between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board. To do.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a game board (for example, a game board 12A) provided with a game area (for example, a game area 12a) and an electric component (for example, a first large winning opening) provided on the back surface side of the game board. Solenoid 53b), a board provided with wiring portions for electrical components (for example, a game board relay board 101), a mounting base provided on the back side of the game board (for example, mounting base 420), and the mounting. A gaming machine provided on the back side of a base, capable of accommodating game machine components, and provided with a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) that covers the electrical components.
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine component in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back surface portion is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base.
The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion (for example, a mounting portion 433) that can be mounted on the mounting base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the mounting portion. It is formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface.
The board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board.
The inclined side surface portion includes an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the game machine component, and an opening (for example, an opening 432e) is provided at a position corresponding to the substrate.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a game board, electrical components, a substrate, a mounting base, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electric parts are provided on the back side of the game board. The board is provided with wiring portions for electrical components. The mounting base is provided on the back side of the game board. The cover member is provided on the back side of the mounting base, can accommodate game machine components, and covers the electrical components. The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the game machine components within the space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions. The width of the back surface is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion is provided with a mounting portion that can be mounted on the mounting base on the end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion provided with the mounting portion to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do.
The board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board. The inclined side surface portion includes an accommodating portion capable of accommodating components, and an opening is provided at a position corresponding to the substrate.

As a result, since the board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board, it is possible to reduce the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board as compared with the case where the board is mounted on the game board on the surface. Further, by covering the electric component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electric component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, since at least one of the side surface portions of the cover member is tilted, the installable area of the game machine component is larger when the depth dimension is the same than when the side surface portion is not tilted, so that more diverse games can be played. It is possible to attach machine components. Further, since the game machine components can be accommodated in the inclined side surface portion, the game machine components are prevented from protruding to the back side of the game machine as compared with the case where the game machine components are integrated on the back surface portion. It becomes possible. Further, by providing an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate on the inclined side surface portion, the installation space of the substrate on the back surface side of the game board is suppressed, and the installable area of the game machine component on the side surface portion of the cover member is further increased. It becomes possible to make it larger.

(About Appendix 31)
Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter sequentially arranged between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame and an outer frame arranged behind the fixing plate are provided, and the fixing plate and the outer frame are provided with an outer frame. Each display opening is provided so that the display object arranged behind the liquid crystal panel can be seen from the front surface side of the liquid crystal panel, and is provided on the circuit board support plate vertically provided on the back side of the peripheral portion of the outer frame. , A game machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-230859). According to such a game machine, by providing the circuit board support plate vertically on the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board as compared with the case where the circuit board is mounted on the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (picture, etc.) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, since the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, and the circuit board support plate is hit. When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint portion between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board. To do.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention has a game board (for example, a game board 12A) provided with a game area (for example, a game area 12a) and an electric component (for example, a first large winning opening) provided on the back surface side of the game board. Solenoid 53b), a substrate to which the wiring portion of the electric component is connected (for example, a game board relay board 101), a mounting base provided on the back side of the game board (for example, a mounting base 420), and the mounting. A gaming machine provided on the back side of a base and provided with a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) for covering the electric component.
The board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board.
On the outer surface of the cover member, a specific accommodating portion (for example, a side surface) capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component (for example, a relay substrate 100) connected to the substrate via an opening (for example, the opening 432e) can be accommodated. A general accommodating portion (for example, an accommodating portion) composed of at least two accommodating portions capable of accommodating the first recess 432a) and a plurality of other types of game machine components (for example, main control board 70A and sub control board 80A). , Side surface second recess 432c, recess 431a),
The board is provided with a game board connector connection portion (for example, a connector connection portion 101a).
The specific game machine component includes a specific component connector connection portion (for example, a relay board connector connection portion 100a).
Each of the plurality of types of game machine components includes a general component connector connection portion (for example, a main control board connector connection portion 70Aa and a sub control board connector connection portion 80Aa).
Each of the general accommodating portions is adjacent to the specific accommodating portion.
The specific accommodating portion is provided with the opening at a position corresponding to the substrate.
The board extends from the outside of the cover member to a position where connection operation with respect to the game board connector connection portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the outer portion of the board is covered with the cover member. ,
The game board connector connection portion and the specific component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member.
The specific component connector connection portion and the general component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a game board, electrical components, a substrate, a mounting base, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electric parts are provided on the back side of the game board. Wiring parts of electrical components are connected to the board. The mounting base is provided on the back side of the game board. The cover member is provided on the back side of the mounting base and covers the electrical components. The board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board.
Then, on the outer surface of the cover member, a specific accommodating portion capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component connected to the substrate via an opening and at least two other accommodating a plurality of types of gaming machine components can be accommodated. It is provided with a general storage unit composed of one or more storage units. The board is provided with a game board connector connection portion. The particular gaming machine component comprises a particular component connector connection. Each of the plurality of types of gaming machine components includes a general component connector connection portion. The general accommodations are adjacent to the specific accommodations. The specific accommodating portion is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate. The board extends from the outside of the cover member to a position where the connection operation to the game board connector connection portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the outer portion of the board is covered with the cover member. The game board connector connection portion and the specific component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member, and the specific component connector connection portion and the general component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member.

As a result, since the board is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board, it is possible to reduce the installation space of the board on the back surface side of the game board as compared with the case where the board is mounted on the game board on the surface. Further, by covering the electric component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electric component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of protecting the board from an external impact while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, a general accommodating portion composed of a plurality of accommodating portions capable of accommodating other gaming machine components is arranged adjacent to the specific accommodating portion capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component, and the specific accommodating portion is provided. Is provided with an opening that can be connected to the wiring from the game board, so that the wiring length between the parts provided in the game board and the plurality of game machine components housed in the general storage portion can be shortened. .. Therefore, it becomes easy to check various game machine components and to handle cables and the like.

(About Appendix 32)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame having the back cover fastening hole and the rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and the through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole. A game machine having a back cover having a locking port formed in the above and a male screw portion that can be fastened to the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame through the insertion hole of the back cover is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-). See 167306). According to such a game machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306, the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame is adjusted, and the insertion hole of the back cover and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame are strictly adjusted so that the male screw portion passes through. Need to match. However, when the back cover is placed on the main body frame, the back cover fastening holes of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to align the back cover with the mounting location of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the work efficiency of assembly.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine including a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. (For example, pachinko game machine 1A)
The mounting frame
A storage tank capable of storing game balls (for example, storage tank 415) and
A first gutter (for example, a first gutter 416) that guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank is provided.
The cover member is
A payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls is attached.
The payout device is provided with a second gutter (for example, a second gutter 434) for guiding the game ball.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In a state of
One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening.
The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means (for example, rib 434b) that guides an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connecting position.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame. The mounting frame includes a storage tank and a first gutter. The storage tank can store game balls. The first gutter guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank. The cover member includes a payout device and a second guide gutter. The payout device can pay out the game ball.
The second gutter guides the game ball to the payout device.
Then, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connecting position.

As a result, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame in the assembly work of the game machine, the opening of either the first guide gutter of the mounting frame or the second guide gutter of the cover member is opened by overlapping the cover members in roughly aligned positions. The portion is guided by the connection position guiding means of the receiving portion of one opening, and is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. In this way, even if one of the openings of the first guide gutter of the mounting frame and the second guide gutter of the cover member and the other opening are not strictly aligned, they can be roughly aligned and overlapped. , The other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

(About Appendix 33)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame having the back cover fastening hole and the rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and the through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole. A game machine having a back cover having a locking port formed in the above and a male screw portion that can be fastened to the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame through the insertion hole of the back cover is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-). See 167306). According to such a game machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306, the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame is adjusted, and the insertion hole of the back cover and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame are strictly adjusted so that the male screw portion passes through. Need to match. However, when the back cover is placed on the main body frame, the back cover fastening holes of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to align the back cover with the mounting location of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the work efficiency of assembly.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine including a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. (For example, pachinko game machine 1A)
The mounting frame
A storage tank capable of storing game balls (for example, storage tank 415) and
A first gutter that guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank (for example, the first gutter 416) and
Withdrawal outlets that can pay out game balls (for example, payout outlet 417),
A third guide gutter (for example, a third guide gutter 418) that guides the game ball to the payout outlet is provided.
The cover member is
A payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, and
A second gutter that guides the game ball to the payout device (for example, a second gutter 434) and
A fourth guide gutter (for example, discharge port 730B) that guides the game ball downstream from the payout device is provided.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In a state of
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the third guide gutter and the fourth guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In a state of
One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening.
One of the third guide gutter and the fourth guide gutter is provided with the receiving portion (for example, the receiving portion 418a).
The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means (for example, rib 434b) that guides an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connecting position.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame. The mounting frame includes a storage tank, a first gutter, a payout port, and a third gutter. The storage tank can store game balls. The first gutter guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank. Game balls are paid out at the payout exit. The third gutter guides the game ball to the payout exit. The cover member includes a payout device, a second guide gutter, and a fourth guide gutter. The payout device can pay out the game ball. The second gutter guides the game ball to the payout device. The fourth guide gutter guides the game ball downstream from the payout device.
Then, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the third guide gutter and the fourth guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. A receiving portion is provided in either the third guide gutter or the fourth guide gutter. The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connecting position.

As a result, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame in the assembly work of the game machine, the opening of either the first guide gutter of the mounting frame or the second guide gutter of the cover member is opened by overlapping the cover members in roughly aligned positions. The portion is guided by the connection position guiding means of the receiving portion of one opening, and the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into the one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. Further, one of the openings of the third guide gutter of the mounting frame and the fourth guide gutter of the cover member is guided to the connection position guiding means of the receiving portion of the one opening, and the other opening is the one opening. By being connected so as to be inserted into the part, the game ball can flow down. As described above, any one of the opening of one of the first guide gutter of the mounting frame and the second guide gutter of the cover member and the other opening, and any of the third guide gutter of the mounting frame and the fourth guide gutter of the cover member. Even if one opening and the other opening are not strictly aligned, the game ball is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening simply by roughly aligning and overlapping. Since it is in a state where it can flow down, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of assembly. Further, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter, and the third guide gutter and the fourth guide gutter can be roughly positioned when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame at the two connecting portions. By aligning the positions, more accurate positioning becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

(About Appendix 34)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame having the back cover fastening hole and the rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and the through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole. A game machine having a back cover having a locking port formed in the above and a male screw portion that can be fastened to the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame through the insertion hole of the back cover is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-). See 167306). According to such a game machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306, the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame is adjusted, and the insertion hole of the back cover and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame are strictly adjusted so that the male screw portion passes through. Need to match. However, when the back cover is placed on the main body frame, the back cover fastening holes of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to align the back cover with the mounting location of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the work efficiency of assembly.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine including a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame. (For example, pachinko game machine 1A)
The mounting frame includes a first gutter (for example, a first gutter 416) that guides the game ball downstream.
The cover member includes a second gutter for guiding the game ball (for example, a second gutter 434).
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In a state of
One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening.
The receiving part
A connection position guiding means (for example, rib 434b) for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connecting position is provided.
The shape of the portion surrounded by the inner edge of the connection position guiding means is substantially the same as the outer shape of the other opening.
The connection position guiding means is inclined downward from the outer edge to the inner edge.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame. The mounting frame includes a first gutter. The first gutter guides the game ball downstream. The cover member includes a second guide gutter. The second gutter guides the game ball to the payout device.
Then, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connecting position, and the shape of the portion surrounded by the inner edge of the connecting position guiding means is substantially the same as the outer shape of the other opening. The shape. The connection position guiding means is inclined downward from the outer edge to the inner edge.

As a result, when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame in the assembling work of the game machine, the cover members are overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. At this time, even if the positions of the openings are slightly different from each other, by pushing the cover member, the other opening is guided by the inclination of the connection position guiding means of the one opening, and the outer edge of the connection position guiding means is guided. It moves from the to the inner edge side, fits into the portion surrounded by the inner edge, and is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. In this way, even if one of the openings of the first guide gutter of the mounting frame and the second guide gutter of the cover member and the other opening are not strictly aligned, they can be roughly aligned and overlapped. , The other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

(About Appendix 35)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame having the back cover fastening hole and the rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and the through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole. A game machine having a back cover having a locking port formed in the above and a male screw portion that can be fastened to the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame through the insertion hole of the back cover is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-). See 167306). According to such a game machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

However, in the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306, the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame is adjusted, and the insertion hole of the back cover and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame are strictly adjusted so that the male screw portion passes through. Need to match. However, when the back cover is placed on the main body frame, the back cover fastening holes of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to align the back cover with the mounting location of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of solving such a problem and improving the work efficiency of assembly.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a mounting frame (for example, a mounting frame 410) arranged on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame (for example, a gaming machine). For example, a pachinko game machine 1A).
The mounting frame includes a first gutter (for example, a first gutter 416) that guides the game ball downstream.
The cover member includes a second gutter for guiding the game ball (for example, a second gutter 434).
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In a state of
One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening.
The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means (for example, rib 434b) that guides an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connecting position.
One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided on the outer edge of the opening and is formed with an outer shape substantially the same as the shape of the portion surrounded by the connection position guiding means. The engaging means (for example, the engaging portion 416a) that engages with the connection position guiding means is provided.

A game machine having such a configuration includes a mounting frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is arranged on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the mounting frame. The mounting frame includes a first gutter. The first gutter guides the game ball downstream. The cover member includes a second guide gutter. The second gutter guides the game ball to the payout device.
Then, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving portion includes a connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connecting position. One of the first guide gutter and the second guide gutter is provided on the outer edge of the opening and is formed with an outer shape substantially the same as the shape of the portion surrounded by the connection position guiding means. It is provided with an engaging means that engages with the guiding means.

As a result, when the cover member is attached to the mounting frame in the assembly work of the game machine, the opening of either the first guide gutter of the mounting frame or the second guide gutter of the cover member is opened by overlapping the cover members in roughly aligned positions. The engaging means of the portion is guided by the connection position guiding means of the receiving portion of one opening, and at the connecting position, fits into the portion surrounded by the connecting position guiding means, and the other opening is placed in one opening. By being connected so as to be inserted, the game ball can flow down. In this way, even if one of the openings of the first guide gutter of the mounting frame and the second guide gutter of the cover member and the other opening are not strictly aligned, they can be roughly aligned and overlapped. , The other opening is connected so as to be inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down, so that the work efficiency of assembly can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the work efficiency of assembly.

Further, when the other opening is guided by the connection position guiding means of one opening, the outer edge of the opening of the other opening comes into contact with the connection position guiding means, but at this time, a force is applied to the outer edge of the opening. In addition, the opening may be deformed, which may hinder the flow of the game ball after connection. According to the present invention, by providing the engaging means on the outer edge of the opening of the other opening, the engaging means is brought into contact with the connection position guiding means, the force applied to the outer edge of the opening is reduced, and after the connection, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being hindered.

(About Appendix 36)
Conventionally, a game machine is disclosed in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line in a linear rectifying gutter, and the game balls guided by the rectifying gutter are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kai 2003-3405). According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent ball clogging of the game ball guided from the storage plate to the launching device.

However, in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-34085, when the discharge port for removing balls is in the open state in the storage dish, the game balls discharged from the ball payout outlet reach the discharge port before reaching the rectifying gutter. There was a problem that the game ball was not supplied to the launching device because it entered and was discharged to the outside.

Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem and allows the game ball released from the payout port to be smoothly dropped and discharged to a predetermined position even when the opening for removing the ball is open in the storage dish. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be guided without.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage dish (for example, a dish unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, and the above. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage plate.
The storage dish has an outer wall (for example, an outer wall portion 930Ea) arranged at least a part thereof at a position facing the discharge port, and is capable of storing game balls released from the discharge port (for example, a storage portion). The storage unit 930E), an alignment unit (for example, an alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a progressive manner, and a rectifying unit (for example, a rectifying unit) that guides the game balls from the storage unit to the alignment unit. 930C) and
The alignment portion is formed so that the upstream side in the alignment direction is separated from the discharge port.
The rectifying unit has a peripheral wall portion (for example, an outer peripheral portion 930B) formed in a curved shape so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port toward the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion.
The storage dish has an opening (for example, a first opening 930F) capable of discharging the stored game ball to the outside of the storage dish.
The opening is provided with a lid (for example, a first opening / closing lid 953A) that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside.
The outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface on which the game balls released from the discharge port can roll while being in contact with each other.
When the lid is in the open state, the opening is directed from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage dish so that the game ball rolling while contacting the continuous surface does not fall into the opening. They are arranged at predetermined intervals.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage plate, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out the game ball. The storage plate can store the game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage plate. The storage dish has a storage unit, an alignment unit, and a rectifying unit. The storage unit has an outer wall at least a part of which is arranged at a position facing the discharge port, and can store the game ball released from the discharge port. The alignment portion is formed so that a plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so as to be able to proceed, and the upstream side in the alignment direction is separated from the discharge port. The rectifying unit has a peripheral wall portion formed in a curved shape so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit in order to guide the game ball to the alignment unit. In addition, the storage dish has an opening that allows the stored game balls to be discharged to the outside of the storage dish. The opening is provided with a lid that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside. Then, the outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface on which the game balls released from the discharge port can roll while being in contact with each other. When the lid is in the open state, the opening is spaced from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage dish so that the rolling game ball that is in contact with the continuous surface does not fall into the opening. Is arranged.

As a result, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage dish rolls along the outer wall while contacting the outer wall, and further rolls along the continuous curved peripheral wall portion upstream in the alignment direction of the alignment portion. The game balls are guided to the side, and in the alignment portion, the game balls are guided in a state of being aligned in a row from the upstream side in the alignment direction to the downstream side in the alignment direction. At that time, even if the lid provided at the opening is in the open state, the game ball released from the discharge port is aligned from the rectifying portion while rolling along the peripheral wall portion from the outer wall without falling into the opening. You will be led to the club. Therefore, the outer wall of the storage portion and the peripheral wall portion of the alignment portion are spaced from the opening at a predetermined distance so as not to fall from the opening while ensuring a relatively long path length from the discharge port to the alignment portion via the rectifying portion. Since the peripheral wall portion is formed in a curved shape, the game ball can be guided smoothly from the rectifying portion to the aligned portion without being smoothly dropped and discharged.

(About Appendix 37)
Conventionally, a game machine is disclosed in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line in a linear rectifying gutter, and the game balls guided by the rectifying gutter are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kai 2003-3405). According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent ball clogging of the game ball guided from the storage plate to the launching device.

However, in the game machine of JP-A-2003-34085, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the rectifying gutter and arrange the game balls in a line as long as possible, so that the entire storage dish becomes horizontally long. There was a problem that it occupies a wide installation space in front of the game machine.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of preventing clogging of game balls while suppressing the width dimension and installation space of the storage plate.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage dish (for example, a dish unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, and the above. A game machine including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage plate.
The storage dish includes an alignment unit (for example, an alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a row so that the game balls can proceed, and a rectifying unit (for example, a rectifying unit 930C) that guides the game balls to the alignment unit. Have and
The alignment portion is formed in a groove shape so as to linearly align a plurality of game balls.
The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit, and is aligned with the alignment unit on the rectifying unit side of the alignment unit. The game ball is provided with a wall portion (for example, a wall portion 920Ac) for preventing the game ball released from the discharge port from riding on the game ball.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage plate, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out the game ball. The storage plate can store the game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage plate. The storage dish has an alignment unit and a rectifying unit. Then, the aligning portion is formed in a groove shape so as to align the plurality of game balls in a row so as to be able to proceed and to linearly align the plurality of game balls. The rectifying section is formed so as to guide the game ball to the alignment section upstream in the alignment direction while bypassing the game ball released from the discharge port. On the rectifying portion side of the aligned portion, a wall portion is provided on the aligned game balls to prevent the game balls released from the discharge port from riding on the aligned game balls.

As a result, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage dish is guided to detour to the rectifying section, and then is guided from this rectifying section to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment section. A plurality of game balls are guided in a state of being aligned straight along the groove. Therefore, while ensuring a relatively long path length from the discharge port to the alignment portion via the rectifying portion, the alignment portion is formed in a linear groove shape, so that the width dimension of the storage dish and the installation space can be suppressed. At the same time, the game ball can be guided smoothly from the rectifying section to the aligning section without clogging the ball. Further, it is possible to prevent the released game balls from riding on the game balls aligned in the aligned portion, causing the alignment to be disturbed and causing ball clogging, or the game balls to jump out of the storage plate.

(About Appendix 38)
Conventionally, a game machine is disclosed in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line in a linear rectifying gutter, and the game balls guided by the rectifying gutter are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kai 2003-3405). According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent ball clogging of the game ball guided from the storage plate to the launching device.

However, in the game machine of JP-A-2003-34085, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the rectifying gutter and arrange the game balls in a line as long as possible, so that the entire storage dish becomes horizontally long. There was a problem that it occupies a wide installation space in front of the game machine.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such a problem and to provide a game machine capable of preventing clogging of game balls while suppressing the width dimension and installation space of the storage plate.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage dish (for example, a dish unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, and the above. A game machine including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage plate.
The storage tray has an alignment unit (for example, an alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a row that allows progress, a rectifying unit (for example, a rectifying unit 930C) that guides the game balls to the alignment unit, and the inside. It has a cover (for example, a cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930) having an opening (for example, an opening 930Ab) into which the game ball can be introduced.
The alignment portion is covered by the cover and is provided so that the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the opening.
The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the opening while guiding the game ball along the outer circumference of the cover.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage plate, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out the game ball. The storage plate can store the game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage plate. The storage pan has an aligning portion, a rectifying portion, and a cover. The cover has an opening into which the game ball can be introduced. Then, the alignment portion is provided so that the plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so as to be able to proceed, and the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the opening while being covered by the cover. The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the opening while guiding the game ball along the outer circumference of the cover in order to guide the game ball to the alignment unit.

As a result, the game ball discharged from the discharge port in the storage tray is guided to the rectifying portion along the outer circumference of the cover, and then enters the opening of the cover from this rectifying portion and is guided to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion. In the alignment section, a plurality of game balls are aligned and guided in a row. Therefore, by forming the rectifying portion and the aligning portion on the outside and the inside of the cover, the path length from the discharge port to the aligning portion via the rectifying portion can be secured to be relatively long. The space can be suppressed, and the game ball can be guided smoothly from the rectifying section to the aligning section without clogging the ball.

(About Appendix 39)
Conventionally, a game machine is disclosed in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line in a linear rectifying gutter, and the game balls guided by the rectifying gutter are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kai 2003-3405). According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent ball clogging of the game ball guided from the storage plate to the launching device.

However, in the game machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-34085, when the discharge port for removing balls is in the open state in the storage dish, the game balls discharged from the ball payout outlet reach the discharge port before reaching the rectifying gutter. There was a problem that the game ball was not supplied to the launching device because it entered and was discharged to the outside.

Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem and allows the game ball released from the payout port to be smoothly dropped and discharged to a predetermined position even when the opening for removing the ball is open in the storage dish. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be guided without.

The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage dish (for example, a dish unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, and the above. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage plate.
The storage dish has an outer wall (for example, an outer wall portion 930Ea) arranged at least a part thereof at a position facing the discharge port, and is capable of storing game balls released from the discharge port (for example, a storage portion). Storage unit 930E), an alignment unit (for example, alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a progressive manner, and a rectifying unit (for example, a rectifying unit) that guides the game balls from the storage unit to the alignment unit. 930C) and a curved peripheral wall portion (for example, outer peripheral portion 930B).
The storage dish has an opening (for example, a first opening 930F) capable of discharging the stored game ball to the outside of the storage dish.
The opening is provided with a lid (for example, a first opening / closing lid 953A) that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside.
The outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface on which the game balls released from the discharge port can roll while being in contact with each other.
The opening is provided on the bottom surface of the storage plate at a predetermined interval from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage plate so that the game ball rolling while contacting the continuous surface does not fall into the opening. Placed with a gap,
The alignment portion is provided inside the peripheral wall portion while the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the peripheral wall portion.
The rectifying portion is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port along the peripheral wall portion and to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage plate, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out the game ball. The storage plate can store the game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage plate. The storage tray has a storage portion, an alignment portion, a rectifying portion, and a peripheral wall portion. The peripheral wall portion is formed in a curved shape. The storage unit has an outer wall at least a part of which is arranged at a position facing the discharge port, and can store the game ball released from the discharge port. The alignment portion is provided so that a plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so as to be able to proceed, and the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the peripheral wall portion and is provided inside the peripheral wall portion. The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion while guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge port along the peripheral wall portion in order to guide the game ball to the alignment portion. In addition, the storage dish has an opening that allows the stored game balls to be discharged to the outside of the storage dish. The opening is provided with a lid that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside. Then, the outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface on which the game balls released from the discharge port can roll while being in contact with each other. When the lid is in the open state, the opening is spaced from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage dish so that the rolling game ball that is in contact with the continuous surface does not fall into the opening. Is arranged.

As a result, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage dish rolls along the outer wall while being in contact with the outer wall, and is further guided to a rectifying portion along the continuous curved peripheral wall portion, and then this rectification. It is guided from the portion to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment portion, and in the alignment portion, a plurality of game balls are aligned and guided in a row. At that time, even if the lid provided at the opening is in the open state, the game ball released from the discharge port is aligned from the rectifying portion while rolling along the peripheral wall portion from the outer wall without falling into the opening. You will be led to the club. Therefore, by forming the rectifying section along the curved peripheral wall portion, the path length from the discharge port to the rectifying section and the alignment section can be secured relatively long, but the storage can be prevented from falling from the opening. Since the outer wall and the peripheral wall of the portion are formed at a predetermined interval from the opening, the game ball can be guided from the rectifying portion to the aligned portion without being smoothly dropped and discharged.

1A Pachinko game machine 2 Main body 2b Main body frame hinge 12A Game board 12a Game area 53b 1st big winning opening solenoid 55 Out opening 55
70A Main control board 70Aa Main control board Connector connection part 80A Sub control board 80Aa Sub control board Connector connection part 100 Relay board 100a Relay board connector connection part 101 Game board relay board 101a Connector connection part 101b Wiring outlet 400 Main body frame 405 Space 410 Mounting frame 411a Fixed part 413 Game board movable stopper 415 Storage tank 416 1st guide trough 416a Engagement part 417 Outlet 418 3rd guide trough 418a Receiving part 420 Mounting base 430 Cover member 431 Back part 431a Recessed part 432 Side first recess 432c Side second recess 432e Opening 433 Mounting part 434 Second guide trough 434a Receiving part 434b Rib 700 Dispensing device 730C First guiding path 730D Second guiding path 700 Dispensing device 710 Ball supply path 720 Ball delivery mechanism 730 Ball passage unit 730A Introductory port 730B Discharge port 730C 1st guide path 730D 2nd guide path 731 Passage partition wall member 732 Full tank detection lever 733 Full tank detection sensor 734 1st cover member 735 2nd cover member 736 Ball pulling member 736A Ball pulling Mouth 800 Ball detection unit 810 Right side component 820 Left side component 830 Protruding piece member 840 First detection sensor 850 Second detection sensor 900 Dish unit 901 Outlet 910 Decorative cover 920 Main body 920A Alignment part 920Aa Guide piece 920Ab Introductory port 920B Lid 930 saucer cover member 930A cover part 930Aa outer side wall 930Ab opening 930B outer circumference 930C rectifying part 930D slope part 930E storage part 930Ea outer wall part 930F opening 940 ball removal passage member VC virtual circle b Mirror member b4 Screen part

Claims (1)

A projection device capable of projecting a predetermined image, a reflection unit capable of reflecting the projected light emitted from the projection device, and a screen unit for projecting the predetermined image by the projection light reflected by the reflection unit are provided. It ’s a game machine
A mounting frame arranged on the front side, a cover member mounted on the back side of the mounting frame and capable of accommodating game machine components, and a mounting base provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. With more
The mounting base is
The projection device and the reflection unit are attached,
The width of the side surfaces facing each other becomes narrower from the front side to the back side.
The cover member is
It is characterized by being formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the game machine, and provided with a housing portion capable of accommodating the game machine component so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the back side of the game machine. A game machine to be.

Images